JP7013041B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, it is common to be able to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when the variable display of the symbol executed based on the establishment of the starting condition has a predetermined special result.

In some such gaming machines, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means, and the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is executed during the variation display of the symbol (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-073377

However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the display content of the display means, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is low.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the present invention, when the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting port) becomes a predetermined special result, the player In a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, a gaming state control means (mainly) that can control a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to display a plurality of effect symbols on the control board 101) and the display means (image display device 14) and execute a variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the plurality of effect symbols during the variation display of the symbols. The effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) and the effect mode for executing the variable effect are controlled to one of a plurality of effect modes (effect modes A0 to A3 and B1 to B2 in FIG. 106). The effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board 105), and the variable effect execution means is controlled during the normal gaming state (FIG. 106). In the effect mode A1), the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in the first display mode (first display mode of FIG. 107), and the second effect mode controlled during the specific gaming state (effect mode of FIG. 106). In B1), when the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a second display mode (fourth display mode in FIG. 108) different from the first display mode and the power of the gaming machine is restored, the first display mode is used. In any of the effect mode and the second effect mode, the combination of the numerical information included in the plurality of effect symbols is common (“1”, “3”, “5” in FIGS. 107 and 108). At the same time, the numerical information included in the plurality of effect symbols is displayed as different numerical information (“1”, “3”, “5” in FIGS. 107 and 108), and the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode. The total number of types that can be derived during the variable display displayed (9 types of normal effect symbols indicating any number from 1 to 9), 2 types of change symbols, and 1 type of pseudo-continuous symbols are more than the above. The total number of types (9 types of normal effect symbols indicating any number from 1 to 9) that can be derived during the variation display displayed in the second display mode is smaller, and the first effect mode is described. When a specific reach effect is executed in the variable effect in the above, the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode before the specific reach effect, and the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode during the specific reach effect. It is displayed in a display mode that is less decorative than the display mode, and at the end of the specific reach effect. When the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode and a specific reach effect is executed in the variable effect in the second effect mode, the effect symbol is before the specific reach effect. The effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode, the effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode during the specific reach effect, and the effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode after the specific reach effect. It is characterized by displaying in an embodiment.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a partial perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A-1) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, (a-2) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, and (b) is a diagram representing a reach determination table. .. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for winning a big hit, and (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for losing. (A) is a diagram showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening / closing control table for long hit games, and (c) is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening / closing control table for short hit games. (A) is a diagram showing a game condition data determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination table in the time saving game state. (A) is a diagram representing a hit determination table for ordinary symbols, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a diagram representing a normal symbol variation pattern determination table, and (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination. A figure showing a table, (e) is a figure showing an auxiliary game control table, and (f) is a figure showing a 2nd start opening open / close control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area, and (c) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area. The figure which shows the structure, (d) is a figure which shows the structure of each storage part of a normal symbol hold storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the general control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the auxiliary game processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the command analysis processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information update process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the process at the time of a start opening winning in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the start opening winning process of FIG. 37. It is a flowchart which shows the icon display mode scenario determination process for non-execution of a fanning effect on an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead zone effect start determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effect determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the icon change notice determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead zone effect end processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the game information display control processing in an effect control board. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the effect information reservation storage area. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the final number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a zone precursor effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for execution of a look-ahead zone effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the handshake event notice execution determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table for the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the dialogue count determination table for the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use. It is a figure explaining the normal mode, the 1st special mode, and the 2nd special mode which are display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special aspect 11-35 which is the display mode of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special aspect 41-65 which is the display mode of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 4th special aspect 11-24, 31, 41 which is a display mode of an icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode determination table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for effect mode A, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for zone fanning effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode A (when the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect are not executed). (A) is a diagram showing an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode A (when the zone fanning failure effect 1 is executed), and (b) is the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode A (zone fanning failure effect 2). It is a figure which shows an example (at the time of execution). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table (at the time of execution of a zone fanning success effect) for effect mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table (during execution of a look-ahead zone effect) for effect mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode B. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode C. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an operation effect determination table for effect mode A, (b) is a diagram showing an example of an operation effect determination table for effect mode B, and (c) is an operation effect for effect mode C. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern A8 referred to in the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern B4 referred to in the effect mode B. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern C4 referred to in the effect mode C. It is a figure which shows an example of the promotion image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the image display device in various game states. It is a figure which shows the display example of the normal variation effect without pseudo in the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the display example of the pseudo-less shortening variation effect in the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the display example of the 1st SP reach variation effect in the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the display example of the normal variation effect without pseudo in the effect mode B. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of a gassing fanning effect executed during normal reach, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of an operation effect executed during normal reach. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of an operation effect executed during SPSP reach, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of an operation effect executed during SPSP reach. It is a figure which shows the production flow of the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows the production flow of a throwing kiss notice. (A-1) is a time chart for explaining the production flow of the zone fanning effect and the look-ahead zone effect (when the zone fanning effect is executed with a 4-second fluctuation effect), and (a-2) is the zone fanning effect and look-ahead. A time chart for explaining the effect flow of the zone effect (when the zone fanning effect is executed with the 8 second variation effect), (b-1) is the display mode of the effect symbol in the zone fanning success effect (4 second variation effect). A time chart for explaining an example of (when the zone fanning success effect is executed), (b-2) shows the display mode of the effect symbol in the zone fanning failure effect 1 (the zone fanning failure effect 1 is a 4-second variation effect). A time chart for explaining an example of (in the case of execution), (c-1) shows the relationship between the stop of a special symbol and the change in the display mode of the icon (when the zone fanning success effect is executed with a 4-second variation effect). The time chart for explanation, (c-2) is the time for explaining the relationship between the stop of the special symbol and the change of the icon display mode (when the zone fanning failure effect 1 is executed in the variation effect of 4 seconds). It is a chart. It is a figure which shows the state before the handshake event notice occurs. (A) is a diagram showing how the hold icon subject to the handshake event notice is displayed in the third special aspect 11, and (b) is the hold icon displayed before the hold icon subject to the handshake event notice. The figure showing how the display mode of is changed to the third special mode 31, (c) is a figure showing the appearance of the handshake event venue related to the handshake event notice, and (d) is the handshake character and escort related to the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows the appearance of a character. It is a figure which shows the state that the hold icon which is the object of the handshake event notice is waiting. It is a figure which shows the state that the hold icon which is the object of the handshake event notice is waiting. It is a figure which shows the state that the handshake event notice is being performed. It is a figure which shows the state that the handshake event notice is being performed. (A) is a diagram showing the state immediately before the end of the handshake event notice, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing the state after the end of the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows the mode that the hold icon changes from the normal aspect to the second special aspect 13. (A) is a diagram showing the state before the throwing kiss notice is given, (b) is a figure showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is the figure showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice. It is a figure which shows the state which flew toward an icon. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a heart hits an icon targeted for a throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a state in which the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is notified. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a state after the notice of throwing kiss is completed. (A) is a diagram showing the state before the throwing kiss notice is given, (b) is a figure showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is the figure showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice. It is a figure which shows the state which flew toward an icon. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a heart hits an icon targeted for a throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a state in which the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is notified. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a state after the notice of throwing kiss is completed. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the state before the zone precursor effect is executed, and (c) and (d) are the states in which the zone precursor effect according to the third special aspect 41 is executed in the icon display mode. It is a figure showing. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing how the icon display mode is performing the zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 4, and (c) is the icon display mode of the third special mode 5 and the third special mode. It is a figure which shows the state that the zone precursor effect by aspect 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion aspect) is executed. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a zone precursor effect is executed in which the icon display mode is the third special mode 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode), and the look-ahead symbol constituting the zone fanning effect is temporarily stopped. In (b), the zone precursor effect is executed according to the third special aspect 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) in which the icon is displayed, and the look-ahead symbol and the zone symbol constituting the zone fanning effect are temporarily stopped. A diagram showing the state, (c) shows that the zone precursor effect is executed according to the third special aspect 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) in which the icon is displayed, and the look-ahead symbol, zone symbol, and rush that constitute the zone fanning effect. It is a figure which shows the state that a symbol is temporarily stopped. In (a), the zone precursor effect is executed according to the third special aspect 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) in which the icon is displayed, and the look-ahead symbol, zone symbol, and rush symbol constituting the zone fanning effect are stopped. In the figures (b) and (c) showing the appearance of the icon, the zone notification effect is performed according to the third special aspect 3 (look-ahead zone notification effect mode), and the look-ahead zone indicates that the icon is in the look-ahead zone. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the zone background image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the zone notification effect is performed by the 3rd special aspect 3 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode) of the display mode of an icon, and the look-ahead zone background image which shows that it is a look-ahead zone is displayed. .. (A) is a diagram showing how the icon display mode is the zone notification effect according to the third special aspect 3 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode), and (b) is the jackpot winning notification in the icon display mode. It is a figure which shows the state of being. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode determination table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example for each effect mode in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the display example for each effect mode in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the display example of the variation effect in the effect mode A1. It is a figure which shows the display example when the effect mode changes during a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the display example which continued in FIG. 110. It is a figure which shows the display example of the variation effect in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the display example which continued in FIG. 112. It is a figure which shows the display example which continued in FIG. 112. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of transitioning to a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the display example of the variation effect in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the display example which continued in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display example which continued in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display example when the effect mode changes during a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the display example of the last variation effect in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the display example which continued with FIG. 120. It is a figure which shows the display example which continued with FIG. 120.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game machine Y, a game board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame Y1, and a game area 2A into which the game ball flows down are formed. It has a game board 2 and a game board 2.

The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island equipment of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via the hinge mechanism portion H on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum, the front portion of the game area 2A and the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 visually covers the front portion of the game area 2A by a glass (transparent member) attached to the window portion provided in the center from the back surface side.

Further, on the other end side of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

The glass door Y2 is provided with a saucer 50 for storing a plurality of game balls and a launch operation device 3 capable of operating for launching the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a launch device 4 (see FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball toward the game area 2A. The launching device 4 is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game ball stored in the saucer 50 is supplied to the launching device 4.

The firing operation device 3 has a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2 and a firing handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31. The launching device 4 launches a game ball with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball firing strength”).

In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, a curved inner rail member 29B, an outer rail member 29C, and a game ball are arranged directly under the large winning opening 8 described later. A guide member 29D having a guide path formed on the upper surface thereof is provided at the second starting port 7.

The decorative frame 29A is fitted in a substantially central portion of the game board 2. An image display device 14 made of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Further, an effect device 17 is provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

The inner rail member 29B is arranged outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is arranged outside the inner rail member 29B. The game ball launched with a predetermined game ball firing intensity climbs between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. A plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 2A. The game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails or windmills.

The game area 2A is provided with a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 11. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detection sensor 11a, and when the general winning opening detection sensor 11a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. (Game value is given).

Further, a winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gate 10 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. On condition that the winning gate detection sensor 10a detects the game ball, a normal symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that is advantageous to the player. The details of the ordinary symbol lottery will be described later.

At the lower part of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, a first starting port 6 that is immutable and is always capable of entering a ball is provided. The first starting port 6 is provided with a first starting port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is executed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects the game ball. The details of the first special symbol lottery will be described later. Further, when the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

A variable second starting port 7 is provided directly below the first starting port 6. The second starting port 7 is controlled by the second starting port control device 70 in either a basic mode (closed mode) in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode (open mode) in which a prize can be won. The second starting port 7 is also provided with a second starting port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is executed on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects the game ball. The details of the second special symbol lottery will be described later. Further, when the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

The normally movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except that a predetermined condition is satisfied), the movable piece 70A is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting port 7 is closed. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes the basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normally movable piece 70A rotates forward around the rotation axis formed at the lower end portion to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled in a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a special aspect of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normally movable piece 70A is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

The predetermined condition for the second start port control device 70 is that it is determined to execute the auxiliary game in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery.

A variable large winning opening 8 is provided on the downstream side of the winning gate 10. The large winning opening 8 is controlled by the large winning opening control device 80 in either a basic mode in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode in which a prize can be won. The large winning opening 8 is provided with a large winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the large winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

The special winning opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a driving unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except that certain conditions are satisfied), the special movable piece 80A is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the large winning opening 8 is played. The ball is closed so that it cannot enter. The closing of the large winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic aspect of the large winning opening 8.

On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward around the rotation axis formed at the lower end portion to open the large winning opening 8 so that the game ball can enter. The opening of the large winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special aspect of the large winning opening 8. When the special winning opening 8 is opened, the special movable piece 80A is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the large winning opening 8.

The predetermined condition for the large winning opening control device 80 is the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery". ”), It is decided to perform a special game (big hit game).

On the surface of the game board 2 below the game area 2A, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold. A hold display device including a display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided.

The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball enters the first start opening 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is It is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 7.

The first special symbol lottery is a big hit judgment as to whether or not a big hit is won based on the special figure judgment information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6, or the result of the big hit judgment. Based on this, it means performing a special symbol determination for determining the type of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In addition, the second special symbol lottery is to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the special symbol determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7, and the second special symbol display. It refers to determining the type of special symbol to be displayed on the device 21. That is, it can be said that each special symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player.

When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 performs variable display of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the result of the first special symbol lottery is notified of the first special symbol. A stop display is displayed. Further, when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 21 performs variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed. The stop display of the symbol is performed.

For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row. In the variable display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 moves and blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the special symbol, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery is turned on.

The ordinary symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the winning gate 10. The ordinary symbol lottery is a device that determines whether or not a player has won a hit based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10, and the ordinary symbol display device based on the result of the hit determination. It means to perform a normal symbol determination for determining the type of a normal symbol to be displayed on 22. That is, it can be said that the ordinary symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that is advantageous to the player.

When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 performs a variable display of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, a stop display of the normal symbol for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed.

For example, the ordinary symbol display device 22 is each equipped with a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of the normal symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the normal symbol, a specific LED indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is turned on.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7 during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game (special game) in which the large winning opening control device 80 is activated, the variable display of the special symbol is immediately displayed. It is not done and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified. That is, the variable display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a certain condition, an upper limit value is set for the number of pieces that can hold the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to "4" for each of the starting ports 6 and 7. That is, up to four rights to execute the variable display of the special symbol can be reserved for each of the starting ports 6 and 7.

The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the number of holds (U1: hereinafter, referred to as "first special symbol hold number") of the change display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbol change display"). do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the number of holds (U2: hereinafter, referred to as "second special symbol hold number") of the change display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special figure change display"). do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 are each provided with, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and a predetermined LED is turned on according to the number of holds.

Similarly, the upper limit number of holdings is set to 4 for the variable display of ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal figure variable display"), and the number of holdings (G: hereinafter referred to as "normal figure holding number") is set. ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided with, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of normal symbol hold.

Further, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device is composed of an image display device 14, an audio output device 15, an effect lighting device 16, and an effect accessory device 17. The image display device 14 and the effect device 17 are provided on the game board 2, and the sound output device 15 and the effect lighting device 16 are provided on the glass door Y2.

The image display device 14 displays various still images and moving images according to the progress of the game to display the effect by the image. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

The effect device 17 is provided with a movable portion 17A, and by operating the movable portion 17A, an effect is produced by the operation. The audio output device 15 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like to produce an audio effect. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp.

Further, the saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects described later.

The effect button device 18 projects an operable effect button 18A, an effect button detection switch 18a for detecting an operation on the effect button 18A, and an effect button 18A in a normal position (normal state) and above the normal position. It is provided with an effect button drive motor 18b for moving (changing) to a position (protruding state) (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Further, a light emitting element (full-color LED, lamp, etc.) for causing the effect button 18A to emit light in a predetermined mode is also provided.

The selection button device 19 includes an operable selection button 19A and a selection button detection switch 19a for detecting an operation on the selection button 19A (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Further, a light emitting element (full-color LED, lamp, etc.) for causing the selection button 19A to emit light in a predetermined mode is also provided.

The selection button 19A includes an upper button 191A, a left button 192A, a lower button 193A, and a right button 194A. The buttons 191A to 194A are provided so as to be pressable while protruding from the saucer 50.

The effect device executes various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As the effect, for example, there is a variable effect (special symbol lottery effect) performed by the image display device 14 based on the results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The variable effect (special figure lottery effect) is performed with a variable display of the effect symbol and a stop display of the effect symbol.

The variable display of the effect symbol is performed in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol fluctuates in a predetermined mode for a predetermined time. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, when the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol are collectively referred to, it is referred to as "effect symbol display"). In the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

The effect symbols represent, for example, three rows of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (for example, numbers from "1" to "9") arranged in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. It is composed of an effect symbol) and three rows of special effect symbols TZ4 (effect symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9") arranged in the end side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. In the variable display of the effect symbols, the effect symbols in each row move from top to bottom (variable display) as if the reels were rotating. The mode of variable display of the effect symbol is not limited to this. Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the stop display of the effect symbols, in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 or the like, the above three rows of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed at the ends. In the side area, the special effect symbols TZ4 in the above three rows are stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on the predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display unit 140) when the effect symbol stop display is performed. In addition, the stop display of the special effect symbol TZ4 notifies that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed.

The result of the special symbol lottery is not notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on the effective line, but by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on the effective line and the arrangement of the special effect symbols TZ4. May be notified. Further, the special effect symbol TZ4 is not displayed on the image display device 14 (variation display and stop display), but is displayed (variation display and stop display) on a dedicated display unit (LED display, etc.). Alternatively, the special effect symbols TZ4 may be eliminated and only the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be used.

In the effect device, in addition to the variable effect (special figure lottery effect), the special game effect performed when the jackpot game is executed, and the variable display of the special symbol or the special game is not performed internally for a predetermined period. Various productions such as demonstration productions performed in the standby state (so-called waiting state for customers) are performed.

On the back surfaces of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, and a game An information output terminal board 108 is provided.

(Internal configuration of gaming machine Y)
Next, the internal configuration of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

The power supply board 107 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine Y (main control board 101, effect control board 102, It is supplied to the payout control board 103, the lamp control board 104, the image control board 105, and various electronic components). In addition, it monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the outside, detects that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, and sends a low-level power failure detection signal to the main control board 101. Output.

Further, the power supply board 107 includes a backup power supply including a capacitor that is stored by supplying power from the outside, and can supply backup power to the main control board 101 even when the power supply is cut off (power failure). The backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control board 102 and the payout control board 103. Further, the backup power source is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The main control board 101 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators), etc., performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, or the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

On the input side of the main control board 101, a first start port detection sensor 6a, a second start port detection sensor 7a, a large winning opening detection sensor 8a, and a winning gate detection sensor 10a pass through an input port (not shown). , And the general winning opening detection sensor 11a is connected. When each detection sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101.

On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating a normally movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70, and a large winning opening control are provided via an output port (not shown). A large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B and the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold are provided via an output port (not shown). The display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling each display device to each display device 20 to 25.

Further, a game information output terminal plate 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information about a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the game machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the above-mentioned predetermined game information (external signal).

The effect control board 102 comprehensively controls the progress of the effect (effect operation). The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 101 from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102 so as to be communicable. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

An effect button detection switch 18a and a selection button detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

When the effect button 18A is operated, the effect button detection switch 18a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been operated to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 serves as a relay board that relays the effect button detection signal.

When the selection button 19A is operated, the selection button detection switch 19a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the operation of the selection button 19A has been performed to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 serves as a relay board that relays the selection button detection signal.

The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A to detect the operation of the upper button 191A, and is connected to the upper button detection switch 191a and the left button 192A to detect the operation of the left button 192A. The lower button detection switch 193a is connected to the lower button 193A to detect the operation of the lower button 193A, and the right button detection switch 194a is connected to the right button 194A to detect the operation of the right button 194A.

When each button detection switch 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a detects an operation, the upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are transmitted via the lamp control board 104, respectively. Is output to the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as "selection button detection signal".

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button detection switch 18a and the selection button detection switch 19a are used to detect the operation (operation) input from the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the player's hand. Even if it is equipped with an infrared sensor (motion sensor) for detecting the movement of the holding, and a detection element capable of detecting an input such as the movement or operation of the player such as a touch panel for detecting a predetermined operation of the player. good.

The sub CPU 102a has a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, and an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the above, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out and arithmetic processing is performed, and based on the processing, a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball from the launcher 4 and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c, and is bidirectionally connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be communicable.

A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout control board 103. The touch sensor 32a is mounted in the launch handle 32 of the launch operation device 3. When a player, a clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32, and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the launch control board 106. The firing volume knob 32b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 to detect the rotation angle.

Further, the firing solenoid 41 of the launching device 4 is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103 via the power supply board 107. When the payout control board 103 receives the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the payout control board 103 permits the firing solenoid 41 to be energized.

Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated and the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 changes, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates, and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the knob 32b of the firing volume is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. As described above, the payout control board 103 energizes and controls the firing solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the firing volume knob 32b to launch the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 106. Since one game ball is fired for each reciprocation of the firing solenoid 41, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

Further, on the output side of the payout control board 103, a payout device 5 for paying out the game balls supplied from the storage tank (not shown) provided in the upper part of the back surface of the game board mounting frame Y1 to the tray 50 (player). The payout drive unit 51 is connected. The payout CPU 103a reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b and performs arithmetic processing based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, and controls the payout device 5 to give the predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area at the time of arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 103a.

The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to each of the above boards. An effect lighting device 16 and an effect accessory device 17 are connected to the output side of the lamp control board 104.

The lamp CPU 104a controls the light emission of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiates the light of the effect lighting device 16 based on the command related to the effect control (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”) transmitted from the effect control board 102. Drive control is performed for the motor to change the direction. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control for the solenoid and the motor that operate the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command.

Further, the lamp control board 104 is connected to the effect button detection switch 18a of the effect button device 18 and the selection button detection switch 19a of the selection button device 19, and is connected to the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18, and the selection button device 19. The effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal are relayed to and from.

The image control board 105 has an image generation unit 105B that generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14, and an audio output device 15. It has a sound generation unit 105C that generates a sound signal related to the sound to be output to the sound output device 15 and outputs the sound to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

The control unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes a control CPU 105Aa, a control ROM 105Ab, and a control RAM 105Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

The control CPU 105Aa is connected to a control ROM 105Ab in which a control program or the like is stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the control CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving the command related to the effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the control CPU 105Aa issues an instruction of the image to be displayed on the image display device 14 to the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also gives the sound generation unit 105C an instruction of the image to be displayed on the image display device 14. An instruction of the voice to be output from the voice output device 15 is given.

The control RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the control CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores the data read from the control ROM 105Ab.

Further, the integrated ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, and displays a control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for the purpose are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. , Various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14 is included.

The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP105Ba (Video Display Processor) which is an image processor, a CGROM105Bb in which image data is stored, and a VRAM 105Bc having a frame buffer and the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. ing.

The VDP105Ba is connected to the CGROM105Bb in which the image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on the instruction from the control CPU 105Aa. The image data is a material representing an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, an individual image such as a landscape, a character, and a background image such as a dialogue that constitutes the effect symbol image or the background of the effect symbol. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame composed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 105Bb is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., which are a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image.

Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 105Bb may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to VDP105Ba. The VDP105Ba divides this pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

Next, the details of the various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 12.

(Big hit judgment table)
4 (a-1) and 4 (a-2) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot determination table for performing jackpot determination. The jackpot determination constitutes the above-mentioned special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not the jackpot is a "big hit" for executing a jackpot game (special game) that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 4A-1 is a table referred to in the first jackpot determination performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 6 (hereinafter referred to as “first jackpot determination table”). On the other hand, FIG. 4A-2 is a table referred to in the second jackpot determination performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7 (hereinafter referred to as “second jackpot determination table”). be.

Each jackpot judgment table is a jackpot judgment table referred to when the jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value) (hereinafter referred to as "low probability jackpot judgment table"). It is composed of a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "high probability jackpot determination table") referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

In each jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by collating the random number for jackpot determination acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 against the jackpot determination table, "big hit" or "loss". Is determined (determined).

If the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the big hit game (special game) accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed after the stop display of the special symbol (special result) indicating the result is executed, and the prize ball is more than usual. Will be in a state where it is easy to acquire. That is, the game value is given to the player.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. 4B. In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and the presence / absence of execution of the reach effect are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the reach effect is executed in the variable effect by collating the reach determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 against the reach determination table. It is determined (determined) whether or not to do so.

If the result of the reach determination is "with reach" to execute the reach effect, the reach effect is performed to raise the expectation of the player to win the big hit in the variable effect (special figure lottery effect). In the present embodiment, the probability that the reach determination table used in the reach determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6 is determined to be “with reach” is the first probability described later. Although it is not divided by the number of reserved special figures, the probability of being determined to have "reach" is divided by the number of reserved special figures, and may be different depending on the number of reserved special figures. For example, the probability that "with reach" is determined in the reach determination table used when the first special figure hold number is the first value (for example, the first special figure hold number = 0 to 1) is the first special figure. The probability that the reach determination table used when the number of reserved figures in the figure is larger than the first value (for example, the number of reserved figures in the first special figure ≧ 2) is determined to be “with reach” should be higher than the probability. Can be done.

Similarly, the probability of being determined to have "reach" in the reach determination table used in the reach determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7 is held in the second special figure described later. Although it is not divided by the number, the probability of being determined to have "reach" is divided by the number of the second special figure hold, and may be different depending on the number of the second special figure hold. For example, the probability that "with reach" is determined in the reach determination table used when the second special figure hold number is the third value (for example, the second special figure hold number = 0 to 1) is the second special figure. The probability that the reach determination table used when the figure hold number is larger than the third value and the fourth value (for example, the second special figure hold number ≧ 2) is determined as “with reach” should be higher than the probability. Can be done.

As the reach effect, for example, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect) is used in two areas of the left side area, the center area, and the right side area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. If the symbol TZ3) temporarily stops and the predetermined effect symbol stops on the predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, the normal state is that the effect symbols representing the winning of the jackpot are arranged (so-called "reach state"). Reach production can be mentioned. In addition to this, there is a full rotation reach effect in which the same type of effect symbols are variably displayed side by side in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

After a reach state occurs in the reach production, a specific production (so-called "SP reach" or "SPSP reach") that raises the expectation of winning a big hit (expecting that the variable display of the special symbol will be a special result) is evolving. It may or may not be done. In addition, the reach state does not always occur in the reach production. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a specific effect is performed that raises the player's expectation for a big hit winning without the occurrence of a reach state. In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the reach effect is performed. However, even in the case of a big hit, the reach determination can be performed, and the reach effect can be performed only when the reach determination determines that "there is a reach".

(Special symbol judgment table)
5 (a) to 5 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a special symbol determination table for performing special symbol determination. The special symbol determination constitutes the above-mentioned special symbol lottery, and the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (stop display mode of the special symbol) is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is to be.

The special symbol determination table is roughly divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit or loss). That is, FIG. 5 (a) shows a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5 (b) shows that the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”. It is a special symbol determination table for loss referred to in the special symbol determination in the case of "loss".

Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of starting port (first starting port 6 or second starting port 7) at which the game ball that triggers the special symbol determination is inserted. When the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol determination table is further divided according to whether or not the reach effect is executed (reach determination result).

In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed (determination result) are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. The type of symbol is determined (determined). As information indicating the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the special symbol stop symbol data and the effect symbol designation command are set.

The special symbol stop symbol data is used in the processing on the main control board 101, and the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing on the effect control board 102. The effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is used in the processing on the effect control board 102.

The effect symbol designation command is 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) in which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It is composed of 1-byte DATA data for identifying the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Regarding the effect symbol designation command, if the MODE data is "E3H", it means that the first special symbol display device 20 performs stop display of the special symbol, and if the MODE data is "E4H", the second special Indicates that the symbol display device 21 performs stop display of a special symbol. The effect symbol designation command whose MODE data is "E3H" is referred to as "first effect symbol designation command", and the effect symbol designation command whose MODE data is "E4H" is referred to as "second effect symbol designation command".

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game control table used when controlling a jackpot game.

The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the big hit game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the big hit game to the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. The designated command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big prize opening 8, the ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and the ending. An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

(Large winning opening opening / closing control table)
6 (b) to 6 (c) are diagrams showing an example of a big winning opening opening / closing control table used when controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 in a big hit game. FIG. 6 (b) is a large winning opening opening / closing control table for a long-hit game referred to in the long-hit game constituting the big-hit game, and FIG. 6 (c) is a short-hit game referred to in the short-hit game constituting the big-hit game. It is a big winning opening opening / closing control table.

The jackpot opening / closing control table for the jackpot game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot 8 in the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 8, the round number (R), which is the number of the round game, and the special electric power, which is the opening number of the large winning opening 8 (operation of the large winning opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time / closing time (operating time / non-operating time) of the large winning opening 8 are set.

(Game condition data judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a game condition data determination table for determining (determining) game condition data newly set after the end of the jackpot game. The game condition data determination table is divided according to the state of the winning probability of the jackpot (low probability game state / high probability game state), and in each divided table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) and the game. Condition data is uniquely associated and stored. The game condition data includes the status of the jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning, the status of the start opening winning ease, and the number of times of special symbol display that can be executed depending on the status of the game condition (Xa, Ja: hereinafter, It represents "the number of executions"), and three types of "00H" to "02H" are set.

FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a game condition determination table for determining a game condition from the game condition data. In the game condition determination table, the game condition data, the ON / OFF of the flag (high probability flag and the time saving flag) indicating the state of each game condition, and the number of times of variable display of the special symbol that can be executed depending on the state of the game condition (Xa). , Ja: Hereinafter referred to as "executable number of times") is uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed can be said to be the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed.

(Variation pattern judgment table for special symbols)
8 to 9 are diagrams showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when determining an mode of variation display of a special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure variation pattern”). The special symbol variation pattern is associated with the time required for displaying the variation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol variation time") and the effect type of the variation effect (special figure lottery effect) according to the variation display of the special symbol. ing. The details of the variation effect will be described later, but it is an effect in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed until the end of the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display of the above-mentioned effect symbol is included in the effect. In addition to variable display of patterns, object images such as characters by the image display device 14, image effect by a predetermined movie image, sound effect by the sound output device 15, lighting effect by the effect lighting device 16, operation effect by the movable part 17A, etc. Consists of.

The special symbol variation patterns are the first special symbol variation pattern, which is an aspect of the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, and the second special symbol variation pattern displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. 2 It is distinguished from the second special symbol variation pattern, which is an aspect of the variation display of the special symbol.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in a non-time saving gaming state described later, and FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a special map variation in a time saving gaming state described later. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table which is referred when determining a pattern. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is roughly divided according to the gaming state.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of special symbol to be variablely displayed (the type of the start port related to the variable display), the special symbol stop symbol data capable of specifying the result of the special symbol determination, and the number of special symbol reservations (the number of reserved special symbols) It is divided by U1 or U2).

In each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more special figure fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by collating the random number for determining the special figure variation pattern acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table is used. Figure The variation pattern is determined.

Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is assigned with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has an expectation of a jackpot winning or a specific jackpot winning (for example, probabilistic jackpot, long hit, etc.). The degree of expectation is associated.

Further, the special symbol variation pattern is formally determined by the special symbol variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the start of the variation display of the special symbol (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S310). It is tentatively determined by the first pre-determination (step S236) or the second pre-determination (step S246) at the time of entering the ball 6 or 7 (during the input control process of step S200).

In addition, a start opening winning designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination described later, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the execution of the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special map variation pattern designation command corresponds to the special map variation pattern determined by the special map variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the execution of the special map variation pattern determination.

The special symbol variation pattern designation command is a 1-byte unit for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) on which variation display of the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is performed. It is composed of the MODE data of the above and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern. Regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it means that the first special symbol display device 20 performs variable display of the special symbol, and if the MODE data is "E7H", the first is 2 Indicates that the special symbol display device 21 performs variable display of the special symbol.

The special figure fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is "E6H" is the "first special figure fluctuation pattern specification command", and the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is "E7H" is the "second special figure". It is called "variation pattern specification command".

The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Regarding the start port winning designation command, if the MODE data is "E1H", it means that the game ball has entered the first start port 6, and if the MODE data is "E2H", it means to the second start port 7. Indicates that a game ball has entered. In addition, the start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is "E1H" is the "first start opening prize designation command", and the start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is "E2H" is the "second start opening prize designation command". ".

Further, in the rightmost column of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, as a reference, the production type (rough classification) of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is described.

Here, the effect type of the variation effect related to the special figure variation pattern described in the effect type column of FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described.

The "normal variation" shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a normal variation effect without reach, and it is difficult for the player to have the expectation of winning a big hit. The "shortened fluctuation" is a fluctuation production in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the normal fluctuation and does not involve reach, and it is difficult to give the player the expectation of winning a big hit. The "ultra-shortened fluctuation" is a fluctuation production in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the shortened fluctuation and does not involve reach, and it is difficult for the player to have the expectation of winning a big hit.

"Reach" means that a part of the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped, and the other effect symbols and the special effect symbol TZ4 fluctuate, giving the player a sense of expectation of the jackpot. It means the variation mode to be given. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying a jackpot, two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at "7" (pseudo stop). ), The remaining effect symbol TZ2 and special effect symbol TZ4 are changing.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 sway slightly or the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped. This mode is sometimes called pseudo-stop. Further, for the special effect symbol TZ4, the variation display is started in synchronization with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the stop display is synchronized with the stop display of the special symbol. Therefore, the effect symbol TZ1 Although the temporary stop is not performed unlike the TZ3, the variable display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the display synchronized with the variable stop (including the temporary stop) may be performed.

The "normal reach" described in FIGS. 8 and 9 means that two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the left side region and the right side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the remaining one effect symbol TZ2 is in the central region. Is fluctuating, and the special effect symbol TZ4 fluctuates in the end side region.

In this embodiment, although "normal reach" is not selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot winning, "normal reach" is selected as the special map fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot winning. You can also do it.

The "SP reach" shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a super reach with a higher expectation of winning a big hit (a special game is executed) than a normal reach. For example, the effect symbol TZ2 in the central region that has not been temporarily stopped may undergo special fluctuations, or a special effect image, movie, or the like may be displayed.

The "SPSP reach" shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a special reach with a higher expectation of winning a big hit (a special game is executed) than a super reach. For example, it may be executed after Super Reach, or a special production image or movie different from Super Reach may be displayed.

Although not described in the column of the effect type in FIGS. 8 and 9, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in any of the variable effects. The "pseudo-continuous effect" is a special effect of temporarily stopping the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and then changing the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 once or multiple times during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one special symbol lottery (. It means a notice effect according to the variation mode (simulating the variation display multiple times). As for the special effect symbol TZ4, the special effect is not performed even during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variable display is continued until the change of the special effect stops.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table in the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 8 is that the ratio of selection / determination of shortened variation increases as the number of reserved special figures increases.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 9 is that the larger the number of reserved special figures, the higher the ratio of selection / determination of ultra-shortening variation.
The second feature is that the ultra-shortening fluctuation (2 seconds), which has a shorter fluctuation time than the shortened fluctuation (4 seconds) in FIG. 8, is set.
The third feature is that a normal fluctuation (6 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation (8 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
The fourth feature is that a long fluctuation (10 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time than the long fluctuation (13.5 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.

10 (a) to 10 (f) show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning a prize at the winning gate 10.

(Collision detection table)
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a hit determination table for performing a hit determination. The hit determination is to determine (determine) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game accompanied by opening the second starting port 7.

The hit determination table is divided according to the ease of winning the starting opening. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-time saving game state and a hit determination table referred to in the time reduction game state.

In each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, either "hit" or "miss" is determined by collating the hit determination random number acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the hit determination table. If the "hit" is won, the auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting port 7 is executed after the stop display of the normal symbol (specific result) indicating the result is executed, and the game ball enters the second starting port 7 more than usual. It is easy to hit the ball and it is easy to win the prize ball. That is, the game value is given to the player.

(Ordinary symbol judgment table)
FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table for performing normal symbol determination. The normal symbol determination is to determine (determine) the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The ordinary symbol determination table is divided according to the result of the hit determination (hit and miss).

In each ordinary symbol determination table, the ordinary symbol determination value and the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by collating the random number for normal symbol determination acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 against the normal symbol determination table. As information indicating the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

The normal symbol stop symbol data is used in the processing on the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the variation display of the normal symbol, and is used in the processing on the effect control board 102.

(Public map fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 10 (c) determines a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal map fluctuation pattern”) associated with a time required for displaying the fluctuation of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal map fluctuation time”). It is a figure which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The normal map fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a normal map variation pattern determination table referred to in the non-time saving gaming state and a normal map variation pattern determination table referred to in the time saving gaming state.

In each table, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more normal map fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the type of the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined by collating the random number for determining the normal map fluctuation pattern acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table. ..

(Auxiliary game reference data judgment table)
FIG. 10D is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary game reference data determination table used when controlling an auxiliary game. Data (auxiliary game reference data) referred to when performing an auxiliary game is stored in this table. As shown in FIG. 10D, the auxiliary game reference data determination table is associated with the combination of the current start opening winning ease and the normal figure stop symbol data, and the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the start opening winning ease state when the normal symbol determination is performed and the result of the normal symbol determination.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 10 (e) is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling an auxiliary game. Conditions for controlling the auxiliary game are stored in this table. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the auxiliary game to the first opening of the second starting port 7, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

(2nd starting port open / close control table)
FIG. 10 (f) is a diagram showing an example of a second start port open / close control table for auxiliary games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second start port 7. The condition for controlling the opening / closing of the second starting port 7 during the auxiliary game is stored in the second starting port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As a condition for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, the normal electric operation number (D), which is the opening number of the second starting port 7 (operation of the second starting port control device 70) in the auxiliary game, and the second 2 The opening time / closing time (operating time / non-operating time) of the starting port 7 is set.

(Explanation of types of special games)
In the present embodiment, the "big hit game" is executed when the "big hit" is won as a special game advantageous to the player, accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening 8 (operation of the big winning opening control device 80). Is provided. The big hit game is mainly divided into a "long hit game" and a "short hit game" according to the difference in the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8.

In the jackpot game, a round game involving opening of the jackpot 8 at least once is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times the large winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total of the times that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are preset. The reason why it is "possible to open" is that the number of game balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the large winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times, the large winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Further, even if the maximum opening time has not passed, the large winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. The maximum number of times the big winning opening 8 is opened and the maximum opening time in each round game may or may not be unified in each big hit game.

(Explanation of game conditions)
Next, the game conditions that are the conditions for the progress of the game will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the ease of winning the starting point are set as the game conditions. Regarding the winning probability of the jackpot, the game progresses under the low probability game state or the high probability game state, and regarding the ease of winning the starting opening of the game ball, the game progresses under the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. do. The initial (when the power is turned on) gaming condition is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and is referred to as a normal gaming state based on this low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. Further, the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are referred to as the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are referred to as the probability-changing gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, a low probability time short game state and a probability change game state may be collectively referred to as a specific game state.

In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state regarding the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to 1/350, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the high-probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state, that is, it is set to 1/40, which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the low-probability gaming state, and the number of times the jackpot can be won per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous for the player. It can be said that it is in a state of being.

The non-time-saving game state is a state in which the ease of winning a prize at the starting opening is normal. Specifically, in the non-time saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time of the second start port control device 70 (second start) that operates when a "hit" is won in the hit determination. It means that the total of the opening time of the mouth 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for a normal symbol is set to 1/50. The reason for the "total opening time" is that the second starting port 7 may be opened a plurality of times for each hit. Since the number of game balls that can be won is limited for each hit, when the number of game balls wins, the game is closed without waiting for the opening time or the number of times of opening.

On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state (low accuracy / high accuracy), the opening time of the second starting port 7 (operating time of the second starting port control device 70) per unit time is larger than that in the non-time-saving gaming state. It refers to a gaming state in which the second starting port 7 is likely to be in the open mode for a long time. Due to the relatively high ease of winning the starting point and the relatively short fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the rate at which a shorter fluctuation time is selected than in the non-time-saving gaming state is selected. The number (the average value of the fluctuation time is short) increases, and the number of times the second special symbol determination can be executed per unit time also increases. Therefore, under the same jackpot winning probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time, the larger the number of jackpot winnings per unit time, and thus the time-saving gaming state ( It can be said that (low probability / high probability) is a state advantageous to the player as compared with the non-time saving game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total maximum opening time of the second starting port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, which is a hit. The probability of winning is set to 49/50. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set in favor of the player over the non-time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving game state, the second starting port 7 is opened twice through the closing (interval) for 1.5 seconds, but there is no such closing and it may be opened only once. Further, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player launches the game ball by operating an appropriate firing handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the time-saving game state, it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 as compared with the non-time-saving game state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the time-saving game state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving game state.

In this way, depending on the winning of the jackpot, the type of jackpot game (long hit game / short hit game) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low probability game state / high probability game state and non-time saving game state / Combination with the time-saving game state) is determined. In view of this, the actual types of jackpots (types of jackpots based on the profitability enjoyed by the player) are the types of jackpot games to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game is completed ( It can be said that it is a combination with the game state). Therefore, in the following, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, the combination of the type of jackpot game guided by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, the type of profit enjoyed by the player is used. It is possible to classify the types of jackpots.

The jackpot that is executed by winning the jackpot and then set to 50 high-probability gaming states and 100 time-saving gaming states (probability-changing game state) is "high-probability long-time-short-long hit (probability-changing jackpot 1)". , The jackpot that causes the long hit game to be executed by winning the jackpot and then set to the high probability game state of 50 times and the time saving game state of 80 times is "high probability middle time saving long hit (probability variable jackpot 2)", short by winning. A jackpot in which a winning game is executed and then set to a high-probability gaming state of 50 times and a time-saving gaming state of 60 times is referred to as a "high-probability short-time-short-short hit (probability variation jackpot 3)".

If the jackpot is won, the normal gaming state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the game is in a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state.

(Control processing of the main control board)
Next, the control process executed by the main CPU 101a on the main control board 101 will be described.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the boot program from the main ROM 101b in response to the power being turned on, determines whether or not the RAM clear switch (not shown) is ON, and when the RAM clear switch is ON. Is a process of initializing each storage area of the main RAM 101c, and when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, a process of restoring (restoring) to the control state before the power cutoff (power failure) is performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure variation random number for determining the special figure variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number. ..

In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates the initial value random number composed of the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the like. After that, the processing of step S20 and step S30 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds), so that the following timer interruption processing is executed.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

In step S110, the main CPU 101a is a special game timer counter that performs a special symbol variation time update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, a special winning opening 8 opening / closing time update process, and the like. Further, a time control process for updating the auxiliary game timer counter that performs the update process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of the normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the second start port 7, and the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a big hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, a hit determination random number, and a normal symbol determination random number.

In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the hit determination initial value random number.

Regarding the update of various random numbers, the random numbers are updated by adding "1" to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers. The random number range is from "0" to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without adding "1", and the random number indicated by the random number counter is already set once. When the lap initial value is reached, the initial value random number at that time is set as a new lap initial value, and each random number value is newly updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a newly valid signal is transmitted from the predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17.

In step S300, the main CPU 101a includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a first special symbol hold display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a large winning opening control device 80. The special symbol special electric control process (special symbol-related process) for controlling (control of the special symbol system device) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26.

In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal symbol control process (normal) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second start port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Design processing) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 to 31.

In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, in the main CPU 101a, whether or not the prize ball counter corresponding to the starting port (first starting port 6, second starting port 7), the large winning opening 8 and the general winning opening 11 exceeds "0". If the number exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

In step S600, the main CPU 101a has external signal output control data for outputting information about the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid. Drive control data for driving the 80B (starting port opening / closing solenoid drive data and winning opening opening / closing solenoid drive data), and predetermined symbols on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25. Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data) for display is performed.

In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs an output control process. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to light each of the LEDs of the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25, a display device output process for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. .. Finally, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. If the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S220. When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the general winning opening winning ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it.

In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 8. If the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a, the process shifts to step S230. When the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds and updates predetermined data to the large winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball, and also wins the large winning opening 8. The counter value of the large winning opening regulation winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 6 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 7 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10 (starting region). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(First start port detection signal input processing of the main control board)
Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the first start port detection signal input process is terminated, and if there is a valid detection signal, "1" is added to the start port prize ball counter for paying out the prize ball in step S232. The first start opening winning flag is turned on in the storage area of the first starting opening winning flag of the main RAM 101c.

In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the first start port detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the step In S234, the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter is added by "1" and updated.

In step S234, the main CPU 101a determines in the main RAM 101c the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in order to update the first special symbol hold display number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23. Set in the area. Further, in step S235, the main CPU 101a sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the first special figure reservation number (U1) is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S236, the main CPU 101a has a jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, a special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, a reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and a special symbol variation pattern. The random number for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern indicated by the random number counter for determination is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Hereinafter, the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination information".

The first special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special symbol determination information is numbered in the storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from the smallest storage part of. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

In step S237, the main CPU 101a makes a first pre-determination based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

Specifically, in the first pre-determination, the stop symbol data of the first special symbol and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information acquired in step S236. That is, the main CPU 101a stops the first special symbol as the first pre-determination before performing the jackpot determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312), and the special symbol variation pattern determination process (step S313), which will be described later. The symbol data and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern are determined.

Then, in step S238, the main CPU 101a issues the stop symbol data of the first special symbol determined in the first preliminary determination and the first start port winning designation command corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation pattern to the transmission data for directing the main RAM 101c. It is set in the storage area (transmission buffer), and the first start port detection signal input process is terminated.

(Second start port detection signal input processing of the main control board)
Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the second start port detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the start opening prize ball counter for paying out the prize ball, updates the second start opening winning rule counter by adding "1", and updates the main. The second start opening winning process for turning on the second starting opening winning flag in the storage area of the second starting opening winning flag of the RAM 101c is performed. The second start opening winning rule counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting opening 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for one auxiliary game is limited.

In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter for counting the second special symbol hold number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the second start port detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is smaller than 4, the step The process is transferred to S244.

In step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value (U2) of the second special figure hold number counter by adding "1". Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a uses the main RAM 101c to display special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in order to update the second special symbol hold display number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24. Set in the specified area of. Further, in step S245, the main CPU 101a sets the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the second special figure reservation number (U2) is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S246, the main CPU 101a has a jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, a special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, a reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and a special symbol variation pattern. The random number for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern indicated by the random number counter for determination is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area.

The second special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special symbol determination information is numbered in the storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from the smallest storage part of. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

Then, the main CPU 101a makes a second pre-determination based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 7 in step S247. Here, the second pre-determination will be described.

Specifically, in the second preliminary determination, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information acquired in step S246. That is, the main CPU 101a has stopped symbol data of the second special symbol as a second pre-determination before performing the jackpot determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312), and the special symbol variation pattern determination process (step S313). And the second special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

Then, in step S248, the main CPU 101a issues the stop symbol data of the second special symbol determined in the second preliminary determination and the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern to the transmission data for directing the main RAM 101c. It is set in the storage area (transmission buffer), and the second start port detection signal input process is terminated.

(Winning gate detection signal input processing of the main control board)
Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined from the winning gate detection sensor 10a whether or not there is a valid detection signal. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main winning gate detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S252.

In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol hold number counter for counting the normal symbol hold number (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main winning gate detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S253.

In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the counter value (G) of the normal figure hold number counter and updates it. Further, in step S253, the main CPU 101a displays the normal symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold display number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. set. Further, in step S254, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved figures (G) in the transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) for effect of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the number of reserved figures (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S255, the main CPU 101a has a hit determination random number indicated by the hit determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number indicated by the normal symbol determination random number counter, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination random number indicated by the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination random number counter. Is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, and the winning gate detection signal input process is terminated. In the following, the random number for hit determination, the random number for normal symbol determination, and the random number for determination of the normal map fluctuation pattern are collectively referred to as "normal map determination information".

The normal symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11 (c)), and the normal symbol determination information is stored in a storage unit having a small number in the storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from the part. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 11D).

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. The value of the special figure special electric processing data is loaded in step S301, the branch destination address is referred to from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310). ), If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the processing is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is performed in the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is transferred to the big hit game end processing (step S350). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 26.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step 310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the number of reserved second special figures (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the number of reserved second special figures (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move the process.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a subtracts and updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter by "1", and in step S310-6, corresponds to the second special symbol hold number (U2) after the subtraction. The special symbol storage designation command to be used is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area. Is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. As a result, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more. When the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more, the process shifts to step S310-5.

The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol hold number counter by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and corresponds to the subtracted first special symbol hold number (U1) in step S310-6. The special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. Is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit) and stored in the 0th storage unit. The figure determination information is deleted. As a result, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each.

In addition, in order to update the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2) with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, specifically, the data. In order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port according to the above, the first and second special symbol hold display data are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the number of special symbol hold (U1 or U2).

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special symbol reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special symbol reservation storage area and shifted (the number of second special symbol reservations is set to the first special symbol reservation). Although it was decided to digest the game with priority over the number, the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted (the first special symbol holding number) in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port. And the 2nd special symbol holding number may be digested in the order of winning), or the 1st special symbol holding storage area may be prioritized over the 2nd special symbol holding storage area and shifted (the 1st special symbol holding number may be the second). It may be digested with priority over the number of special figures reserved).

If it is determined in step S310-4 that the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to steps S319-1 to S319-3 to set the customer waiting state. Performs wait state setting processing. In addition, the customer waiting state means a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

As the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines in step S319-1 whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. When the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and determines the customer waiting state in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. If the flag "01H" is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area so that the customer waiting state is not repeatedly set in duplicate.

In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process. As a result, the effect control board 102 is notified that the customer is waiting.

In step S311 the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot determination process based on the data shifted and newly stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol this time is the variation display of the first special symbol based on the subtraction of the first special symbol reservation number (U1).

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that the first special symbol is a variable display, the main CPU 101a selects the first special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is not the first starting port 6 (it is the second starting port 7), the main CPU 101a selects the second special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-3.

Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is in a high-probability gaming state with respect to the current jackpot winning probability.

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, further "from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3". Select the "first high-probability jackpot determination table" or the "second high-probability jackpot determination table".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, further "first low probability" from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. Select "Big hit judgment table" or "Second low probability big hit judgment table".

In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6, and selects the "high probability jackpot" selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. It is collated with the "judgment table" or the "low probability jackpot determination table" to determine whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss", and the main jackpot determination process is terminated.

When the jackpot determination process is completed, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 21.

First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit winning". Here, if it is determined as "big hit winning", the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for big hit winning in step S312-4, and if it is not determined as "big hit winning", the step The process is transferred to S312-2.

The main CPU 101a makes a reach determination in step S312-2. Specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is collated with the reach determination table.

In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is determined as "with reach" as a result of the reach determination in step S312-2. If it is determined that there is "reach", the process is transferred to step S312-5, and a special symbol determination table for loss with reach is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not "with reach", that is, "without reach", the process is transferred to step S312-6, and a special symbol determination table for loss without reach is selected.

In step S312-7, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the special symbol storage determination process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7). ), In step S312-8, either the special symbol determination table for the first starting port or the special symbol determination table for the second starting port is selected based on the type of the starting port.

In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol determination that is shifted in step S310-8 and collates the special symbol determination random value in the 0th storage unit with the selected special symbol determination table.

Then, in step S312-10, the effect symbol designation command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S212-9, and the determined effect symbol designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Next, in step S312-11, the main CPU 101a is based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, and the stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol stop symbol data"), that is, the special symbol. Is determined, and the determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

As will be described later, the determined special symbol stop symbol data determines a "big hit special symbol" or the like in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 24 when the special symbol variation pattern is determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of FIG. 22. At the same time, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG.

In step S312-12, the main CPU 101a collates the special symbol stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area and selects a game condition data determination table according to the state of the current jackpot winning probability. Next, the game condition data is determined by collating the special figure stop symbol data with the selected game condition data determination table, and the game condition data is set in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination, the special figure variation pattern including information on the special figure variation time and the effect type of the variation effect described later is generated. decide.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment processing of the main control board)
The special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 22. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the ON / OFF of the high-probability flag and the ON / OFF of the time-saving flag, which will be described later, in the current gaming state (high-probability gaming state / low-probability gaming state, and , Time-saving game state / non-time-saving game state), and select the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the game state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a confirms the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c, and determines the special symbol variation pattern determination table based on the special symbol stop symbol data. This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table divided according to the gaming state is further divided by the special figure stop symbol data.

If the special symbol stop symbol data is "19" or "29", that is, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss without reach, the number of special symbol reservations related to this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination (U1 or The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined based on U2). This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table relating to the loss without reach is also divided according to the number of special figure reservations.

When the special figure variation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a determines the special figure variation pattern in step S313-3. Specifically, the random number for determining the special figure variation pattern is collated with the determined special figure variation pattern determination table, and the special figure variation pattern is determined.

When the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. Set in the data storage area.

As a result, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 receives the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, and the special symbol variation pattern designation command to display the variation of the special symbol. Recognizes that is started, and determines the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect based on the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the special figure variation pattern specification command. The effect control board 102 may recognize that the variation display of the special symbol is started by receiving the effect symbol designation command and / or the special symbol variation pattern designation command. Further, the game state designation command may be transmitted after the effect symbol designation command or the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted.

Then, in step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure fluctuation time (see FIGS. 8 and 9) associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets the special symbol variation display data in order to display the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of special symbol display device to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

In step S310-12, the main CPU 101a sets the flag "00H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area to end the customer waiting state, and in step S310-. In 13, the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 is set, and the present special symbol storage determination processing is terminated.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 23. First, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol ends in step S320-1, in other words, whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310-10 has elapsed (special game timer). Counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, if it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is not completed, the special symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol ends, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special symbol variation stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol ends. Set in the transmission data storage area.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a stops and displays the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, and the special symbol stop display data is based on the special symbol stop symbol data set in step S312-11. To set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol stop time”, for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

Then, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electric processing data in step S320-5, turns off the first start opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag in step S320-6, and performs this special symbol variation processing. To finish.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24. First, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends in step S330-1, in other words, the special symbol stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed. Determine if it has been done. As a result, if it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is not completed, the stop display of the special symbol is terminated, and if it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is terminated, the process is transferred to step S330-2.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned ON (set) in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area means that the time saving gaming state is currently in effect. When the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area, the process is transferred to step S330-3, and when the time saving flag is turned off in the time saving flag storage area, the processing is transferred to step S330-7.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a is set to "1" from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the time-saving game state, which indicates the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol due to the time-saving game state (J: hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times in the time-saving game state"). The calculated value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "" is stored as the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state (J).

In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time saving number of times designation command corresponding to the time saving game state remaining number of times (J) in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the time saving game state remaining number of times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for displaying the time saving remaining number of times information (also referred to as remaining time saving number of times information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J) = 0. If the number of remaining time-saving game states (J) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-6, and if the number of remaining time-reduced game states (J) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-7.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a turns off (clears) the time saving flag stored in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the remaining number of times (J) in the time-saving game state becomes "0" means that the variation display of the special symbol is performed the number of times (Ja) that the variation display of the special symbol can be executed in the time-saving game state, and the variation display of the special symbol depending on the "time reduction" state. Means that is finished.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability flag is ON (set) in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the high-probability flag is turned ON in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is currently in a high-probability gaming state. If the high-probability flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area, the process is transferred to step S330-8, and if the flag is turned off in the high-probability flag storage area, the process is performed in step S330-12. Move.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a is a counter value of a high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of variation display of the special symbol due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “high-probability gaming state remaining number”). The calculated value (X-1) obtained by subtracting "1" from is stored as a new high-probability gaming state remaining number of times (X).

In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a sets the high-probability number of times designation command corresponding to the high-probability game state remaining number of times (X) set in the high-probability game state remaining number of times counter in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the high-probability remaining number of times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and a process for displaying the high-probability remaining number of times information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number of times information) is performed on the image display device 14.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining number of times (X) = 0. If the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-11, and if the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-12.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a turns off the high probability flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the remaining number of times (X) in the high-probability gaming state becomes "0" means that the variable display of the special symbol is performed the number of times (Xa) that the variation of the special symbol can be executed in the high-probability gaming state, and the special symbol in the "high probability" state is performed. It means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets the game state designation command indicating the game state in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the current gaming state is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is "big hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). do. Here, if it is not determined to be a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-14, and if it is determined to be a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-15.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data, and performs a process for shifting the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data, and in step S330-16, the game condition flag storage area (time saving flag storage area and high probability flag storage area) and the high probability game state are set. Reset (clear) the remaining fluctuation count counter and the remaining fluctuation count counter in the time-saving gaming state. That is, it is controlled to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect as the jackpot game opening process. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time according to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. First, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-1 whether or not it is currently opening. The opening here means the period from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game (the first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the main jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S340-3. ..

In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, it is confirmed which big hit is according to the special figure stop symbol data, the big winning opening opening / closing control table according to the type of big hit is selected, and it is set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the long-hit game large winning opening opening / closing control table or the short-hit gaming large winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Next, the main CPU 101a stores the value stored in the round game number storage area by adding "1" to the round number (R). At the time of step S340-3, the round game is played even once. Since it has not been executed, the main CPU 101a stores "1" in the round game count storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, the value stored in the special electric operation number storage area (“1” is added to the special electric operation number (K) and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a energizes the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B. In order to open the large winning opening 8, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Here, the main CPU 101a sets the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3. With reference to this, the opening time of the large winning opening 8 (operating time of the large winning opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter based on the round number (R) and the special electric operation number (K). The game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and if K = 1, a round designation command indicating the current number of round games specified by the storage value of the round game count storage area is issued. Set in the transmission data storage area for production. This is to transmit the information that the round game is started to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first opening of the first round game of the long hit game, "1" is set in the round game number storage area and "1" is set in the special electric operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating a one-round game is set in the transmission data storage area for production. On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the special electric operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits the round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, the image display device 14 displays the effect, for example, "ROUND1".

In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending here means the period from the completion of all the preset round games (the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is completed) to the end of the main jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the ending is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-17, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is determined. Move the process to.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the large winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the large winning opening control device 80 is operating. When the main CPU 101a determines that the large winning opening 8 is being opened, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-8 whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 8 is satisfied. do. As this "opening end condition", the counter value of the large winning opening specified winning counter has reached the specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). It became) is adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the main jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening closing process. In the large winning opening closing process, in order to close the large winning opening 8, the energization stop data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c, and the large winning opening opening / closing determined in step 340-3 is performed. With reference to the control table, the closing time of the large winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current round number (R) and the special electric operation number (K). As a result, the large winning opening 8 will be closed.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game is completed. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the large winning opening specified winning counter is the specified number ( For example, since the process ends on the condition that the number reaches 9), it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process is transferred to step S340-12, and when it is determined that one round has not been completed, the main jackpot game process is terminated.

If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the large winning opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether or not the preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the main jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-4.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electric operation number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the large winning opening regulation winning counter is cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot game ends, that is, whether or not the value stored in the round game count storage area (round number (R) is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game). When the main CPU 101a determines "Yes", the process is transferred to step S340-15, and when the determination is "No", the process is transferred to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a is updated and stored by adding "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game end process. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game count storage area is reset.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, the type of jackpot is confirmed according to the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the ending time according to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-18, and the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the game has not been performed, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG. 26.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a loads the game condition data.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high-probability flag is not turned on, the process shifts to step S350-5, and if it is determined that the high-probability flag is turned on, the high-probability flag is stored in the high-probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-3. While turning on (01H), a high-probability game state setting process is performed in which the number of times the game can be executed (Xa) is set in the high-probability game state remaining number counter.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a sets the high-probability number of times designation command corresponding to the high-probability game state remaining number of times (X) set in the high-probability game state remaining number of times counter in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the high-probability remaining number of times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and a process for displaying the high-probability remaining number of times information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number of times information) is performed on the image display device 14.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the time reduction flag in the time reduction flag storage area. When the main CPU 101a determines that the time saving flag is not turned on, the process shifts to step S350-8, and when it is determined that the time saving flag is turned on, the main CPU 101a turns on the time saving flag in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-6. , The time-saving game state setting process is performed to set the number of times that the game can be executed (Ja) in the time-saving game state remaining number counter.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 101a sets the time reduction number of times designation command corresponding to the time reduction game state remaining number of times (J) set in the time reduction game state remaining number of times counter in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the time saving game state remaining number of times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for displaying the time saving remaining number of times information (also referred to as remaining time saving number of times information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, sets a game state designation command indicating the state of the current game condition in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S350-9, the special feature is set. 0 is set in the figure special electric processing data, and the processing is transferred to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the command indicating the remaining number of times of the reduced working hours (J) is transmitted as the command for specifying the number of times of shortening of working hours, but it may be a command indicating the number of times of variation display executed in the reduced working hours game state. Further, although a command indicating the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) is transmitted as the high-probability number-of-times designation command, it may be a command indicating the number of fluctuation displays executed in the high-probability gaming state.

Further, although the time reduction number of times specification command and the high probability number of times specification command are transmitted to the effect control board 102 separately from the game state specification command, the time reduction game state remaining number of times (J) and the high probability game state remaining number of times ( X) may be included in the game state designation command and transmitted to the effect control board 102. Further, the command for specifying the number of times for shortening the time and the command for specifying the number of times with high probability may not be transmitted to the effect control board 102.

(Fundamental control processing of the main control board)
FIG. 27 will be used to explain the Fuzu Fuden control process. First, the main CPU 101a loads the value of the normal power processing data in step S401, refers to the branch destination address from the normal power processing data loaded in step S402, and sets the normal power processing data = 0. For example, a normal symbol memory determination process including a normal symbol determination as to whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (open the second starting port 7) based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the winning gate 10. If the processing is transferred to (step S410) and the normal symbol processing data = 1, the processing is performed in the normal symbol variation processing (step S420) when the normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuating based on the normal symbol determination. If it is transferred and the normal symbol processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the normal symbol stop processing (step S430) when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped, and if the normal symbol processing data = 3. The process is transferred to the auxiliary game process (step S440) in which the opening / closing control of the second start port 7 is performed (the second start port control device 70 is operated).

(Ordinary symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
A normal symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, and if it is determined that the variation display is in progress, the present normal symbol storage determination process is terminated, and the variation display is in progress. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the process is transferred to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the normal figure hold number counter for counting the normal figure hold number (G) is 1 or more. When the number of reserved symbols (G) is "0", the variation display of the normal symbol is not performed, so the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is "1" or more, in step S410-3, the counter value (G) of the normal symbol holding number counter is changed to "1". 1 ”is subtracted and updated, a new normal symbol hold number (G) is set, and in step S410-4, a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the subtracted normal figure hold number (G) is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the number of reserved figures (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a shifts the normal figure determination information stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, the normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit having the previous number. At this time, the normal figure determination information stored in the previous storage unit is written in a predetermined processing area and is erased from the normal symbol reservation storage area. Here, in order to change the display content of the normal symbol hold display device 25 with the shift of the normal symbol determination information, specifically, to display the current number of normal symbol hold display (G), the normal symbol hold display data. Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs a hit determination, that is, a determination of a hit determination random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 101a is shifted in step S410-5, and the hit determination random number in the 0th storage unit is collated with the hit determination table for the normal symbol stored in the main ROM 101b to determine whether or not the hit is achieved. Judgment is made. In the present embodiment, since the hit determination table is associated with the start opening winning ease state (non-time saving game state / time saving game state) (see FIG. 10A), the time saving flag storage area. Check, and select the collision detection table for the normal symbol related to the current state of ease of winning the starting opening.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a makes a normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a performs a normal symbol determination by collating the random number for normal symbol determination in the 0th storage unit, which is shifted in step S410-5, with the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 101b. As described above, this ordinary symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (hit / loss). Therefore, the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the ordinary symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is displayed. select.

Then, in step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol stop symbol data"), that is, the type of the normal symbol, based on the result of the normal symbol determination. The determined normal figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, and in step S410-9, a normal effect symbol designation command corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol data is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal drawing stop data is notified to the effect control board 102.

The determined normal symbol stop symbol data is used in the auxiliary game process of FIG. 31 when determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, and in determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit normal symbol in the normal symbol stop process of FIG. It is also used in determining the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 7.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a determines the normal map fluctuation pattern. Specifically, since the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the normal map fluctuation pattern is classified according to the state of ease of winning the start opening, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time saving flag storage area, and then confirms the time saving flag storage area. Select the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table related to the current start opening winning ease status. Then, the main CPU 101a collates the random number for determining the normal figure fluctuation pattern in the 0th storage unit, which is shifted in step S410-5, with the selected normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and collates the normal figure fluctuation pattern (normal figure). Fluctuation time) is determined.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The normal figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the variation display of the normal symbol starts by receiving this command, and can execute the roulette effect described later.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S410-13, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol variation display data in order to display the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 22, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, in step S410-14. , The auxiliary game reference data is determined by collating the normal figure stop symbol data with the auxiliary game reference data determination table, and is set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 101a sets "1" in the normal symbol processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation processing. The normal symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

(Ordinary symbol fluctuation processing of main control board)
Next, the normal symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 29. First, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol ends in step S420-1, in other words, whether or not the normal symbol variation time set in step S410-12 has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter). = 0?) Is determined. As a result, if it is determined that the variation display of the normal symbol is not completed, the normal symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 101a sets the normal effect symbol stop designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S420-3, it is normal based on the normal effect symbol stop symbol data set in step S410-8. The normal figure stop display data for stop display is set in the symbol display device 22. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. In step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the auxiliary game counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the normal symbol processing data and ends the normal symbol variation processing.

(Normal symbol stop processing of main control board)
Next, the normal symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S430-1, whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol ends, in other words, whether or not the normal symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter in step S420-4 has elapsed. Whether or not (auxiliary game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, if it is determined that the stop display of the normal symbol is not completed, the normal symbol stop process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the normal symbol is completed, in step S430-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the hit determination result related to the normal symbol stop process is "hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol data stored in the normal symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the normal symbol. Here, if it is determined to be a hit normal symbol, the process is transferred to step S430-4, and if it is not determined to be a hit normal symbol, the process is transferred to step S430-3.

In step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the normal power processing data. Then, in step S430-5, the main CPU 101a sets the opening designation command corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 101c, and responds to the normal figure stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game opening process for setting the opening time in the auxiliary game timer counter is performed. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is completed, the normal symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the normal symbol processing data and ends the normal symbol stop processing.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
Auxiliary game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31. First, in step S440-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S440-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S440-5.

In step S440-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S440-3.

In step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects a second start port open / close control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and sets the second start port open / close control table in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a performs the second starting port opening process. In the second start port opening process, first, the value stored in the normal electric operation number storage area (“1” is added to the normal electric operation number (D) and stored. Then, in order to operate the normal movable piece 70A. The energization start data of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set in, and the current normal electric operation number (D) is used with reference to the second starting port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3. The opening time of the second starting port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

In step S440-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending here means a period from the end of the final opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, if it is determined that the main CPU 101a is currently ending, the process is transferred to step S440-12, and if it is determined that the ending is not currently performed, the process is transferred to step S440-6.

In step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second starting port 7 is open. When the main CPU 101a determines that the second starting port 7 is being opened, whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the second starting port 7 is satisfied in step S440-7. To judge. As this "opening end condition", the counter value of the starting port specified winning counter has reached the specified (maximum) number (for example, 10), or the opening time of the second starting port 7 has elapsed (one opening time has elapsed). Auxiliary game timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S440-8, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process. ..

In step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs the second starting port closing process. In the second starting port closing process, the energization stop data of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set in order to close the second starting port 7, and the second starting port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3 is set. With reference to, the closing time of the second starting port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current normal electric operation number (D). As a result, the second starting port 7 is closed.

In step S440-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied and the auxiliary game ends. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal electric operation number (D) is the number of times the second starting port 7 is opened in advance, or the counter value of the second starting port specified winning counter is the maximum number (for example, 10). ) Has been reached. Then, when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S440-10, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process. ..

In step S440-10, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game end process in which "0" is set in the normal electric operation number storage area and "0" is set in the second start opening winning rule counter. That is, the normal electric operation number storage area and the second start port regulation winning counter are cleared.

In step S440-11, the main CPU 101a sets the ending designation command corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect, and the ending time according to the normal figure stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-6 that the second starting port 7 is not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-13 whether or not the closing time set in step S440-8 has elapsed. do. The closing time is also determined by whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, like the opening time. As a result, if it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process, and if it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S440-4.

In step S440-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S440-14 and elapses the ending time. If it is determined that this has not been done, the auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S440-14, the main CPU 101a sets the normal drawing processing data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game processing.

(Control processing of production control board)
Next, the control process executed by the sub CPU 102a on the effect control board 102 will be described.

(Main processing of production control board)
First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. This main process is executed when power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a and a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a.

First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and an initialization process for initializing the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored is performed.

In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a includes a random number for determining the icon display mode, a random number for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern, a random number for determining the look-ahead zone effect scenario, a random number for determining the final number of people, a random number for determining the precursor effect scenario, and a variation effect pattern. It is composed of a random number for determination, a random number for determining the effect mode, and the like, and performs an effect random number update process for updating the effect random number used for determination for controlling the effect.

A random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of the various random numbers constituting the effect random number. In the process of updating the random number for production, a random number counter provided for each type of random number is added by "1". A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random numbers. The random number range is from "0" to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without being added by "1".

Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set so as to differ depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the random numbers for production from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counters related to the production random numbers from completely synchronizing, instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, the various production random numbers are provided with different initial value random numbers. When updating a random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random number value may be newly updated from the initial value random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control board)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. This timer interruption process is executed by generating clock pulses at predetermined cycles (for example, 4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a into the stack area.

In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs a time control process for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown), and stores the received command in the reception buffer. After that, the process of analyzing the received command in the command analysis process is performed.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting effect control process for controlling a customer waiting effect performed in a customer waiting state in which a variable display of a special symbol or a special game (big hit game) is not executed.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a checks the input signal from the effect button detection switch 18a or the selection button detection switch 19a, and executes an operation effect or the like based on an operation on the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A. Performs effect input control processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a can execute the game information related to the game to be notified (displayed) in the current game state (right-handed information prompting the right side area of the game area 2A to launch the game ball, and the probability changing game state). High-probability remaining number information, which is the remaining number of variable displays, information on the remaining number of variable displays, which is the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed in the low-probability time-shortened game state, and jackpots that occur while the time-saving game state continues. The game information display control process is performed to display the information on the number of jackpot consecutive villas, which is the number of times of the game, the left-handed information for prompting the launch of the game ball in the left area of the game area 2A, and the like) on the image display device 14.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs a data output process of transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing of the production control board)
The command analysis process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a receives a new command and determines whether or not the command is stored in the receive buffer. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis, and when it determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303, and determines that the command is not a customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1304.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a performs the customer waiting effect preparation process and ends the command analysis process. In the customer waiting effect preparation process, the sub CPU 102a turns on the customer waiting effect waiting flag in the customer waiting effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the waiting time until the customer waiting effect is started (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, for example. 30 seconds) is set in the customer waiting effect timer counter.

In the customer waiting effect control process of step S1400, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect waiting time set in the customer waiting effect timer counter has elapsed, and determines that the customer waiting effect waiting time has elapsed. Then, the customer waiting effect waiting flag is turned off, the customer waiting effect execution flag is turned ON, and the customer waiting effect control command indicating the effect information of the customer waiting effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

As a result, the customer waiting effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700, and the customer waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The production is repeated. The execution and standby of the customer waiting effect are terminated based on the fact that the game state designation command, the special symbol designation command, the special symbol variation pattern designation command, and the like are transmitted from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102.

In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1305, and determines that the command is not a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1306.

In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of special figure reservations stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, which will be described later, in response to the special symbol storage designation command, and various types stored in the effect information hold storage area. The hold information update process for shifting the effect information and displaying the hold icons corresponding to the special figure hold number on the image display device 14 is performed, and this command analysis process is terminated. The pending information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the start opening winning designation command, the process is transferred to step S1307, and when it is determined that the command is not the starting opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1308.

In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a is a so-called look-ahead notice such as a look-ahead zone effect (continuous notice effect) or a hold icon change notice executed over a variation display (variation effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols based on a preliminary determination result. This command analysis process ends after performing the start-up prize-winning process for determining (effect) and setting information related to pre-reading notice (effect). The processing at the time of winning the starting opening will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

As continuous notice effects, a countdown notice effect in which the image display device 14 displays a countdown for each change effect toward the change effect to be announced, and a notice on the image display device 14 for each change effect toward the change effect to be announced. Continuous cut-in notice effect that displays the cut-in of the image, continuous step-up notice effect that displays the step-up of the notice image on the image display device 14 for each change effect toward the change effect of the notice target, up to the change effect of the notice target It is also possible to execute a chance eye advance notice effect for stopping and displaying the effect symbols (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3) in an arrangement having a predetermined regularity for each variation effect.

In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1309, and when it determines that the command is not the game state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1311.

In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a performs a game state update process for updating the game state stored in the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 102c to the game state specified by the game state designation command, and changes in step S1310. The effect mode setting process for setting any of the plurality of effect modes related to the execution of the effect is performed, and this command analysis process is terminated. The effect mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode (category) of the variation effect performed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to the variation display of the special symbol executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. ), In the present embodiment, three types of effect modes, an effect mode A, an effect mode B, and an effect mode C, are provided.

The effect mode A is a normal effect mode indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, which is set corresponding to the normal gaming state which is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. The effect mode B is an effect mode indicating that the game state is the most advantageous to the player, which is set corresponding to the probabilistic game state, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The effect mode C is an effect mode indicating that the gaming state is the second most advantageous game state set corresponding to the low probability time-saving gaming state, which is the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.

In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an effect symbol designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the effect symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step S1312, and when it is determined that the command is not the effect symbol designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1313.

The sub CPU 102a is stopped on the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, that is, on a predetermined effective line as a result of the variation effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during the variation display of the special symbol in step S1312. Performs the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process for determining the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the special figure variation pattern specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1314, and determines that the command is not the special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1318. ..

In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to start the look-ahead zone effect, which is a kind of look-ahead advance notice (effect) based on the pre-determination result, and performs a process for starting the look-ahead zone effect start determination. Perform processing. The look-ahead zone effect start determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining an effect content (aspect) of the variation effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during the variation display of the special symbol. The variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the operation effect during the variation effect based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process and the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect pattern determination process, as well as the operation effect to be executed. Performs operation effect determination processing for determining the type and the like. The operation effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

Whether or not the sub CPU 102a changes the hold icon or the changing icon displayed on the image display device 14 (hereinafter, the case where both the holding icon and the changing icon are simply referred to as “icon”) in step S1317. Icon change notice judgment processing is performed, and this command analysis processing is terminated. The icon change notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the special figure fluctuation stop designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the special figure fluctuation stop designation command, it shifts the process to step S1319, and when it determines that there is no special figure fluctuation stop designation command, it shifts the process to step S1321. ..

In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect symbol variation stop process in which an effect symbol stop control command indicating that the effect symbol is stopped and the variation effect is terminated is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The effect symbol fluctuation stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. Upon receiving the effect symbol stop control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variation effect is terminated, display the stop of the effect symbol, and end the variation effect.

In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs a look-ahead zone effect end process for ending the look-ahead zone effect triggered by the end of the variation display of the special symbol, and ends the command analysis process. The look-ahead zone effect end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a high-probability number-of-times designation command or a time-saving number-of-time designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a high probability number of times specification command or a time reduction number of times specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1322 and determines that the command is not a high probability number of times specification command or a time reduction number of times specification command. Then, the process is transferred to step S1323.

In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a updates the high probability remaining number of times, which is the remaining number of fluctuation displays (variation effect) that can be executed in the probabilistic game state based on the received high probability number of times designation command, or specifies the received time reduction number of times. Based on the command, the remaining number of times is updated, which is the remaining number of times of the variation display (variation effect) that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving game state, and the command analysis process is terminated.

In step S1323, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening designation command of the jackpot game. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening designation command for the jackpot game, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1324, and determines that there is no jackpot game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1326.

In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a determines an opening effect pattern, which is an effect mode of the opening effect performed during the opening of the jackpot game, and sets an opening effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined opening effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Performs the opening effect pattern determination process.

The opening effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the opening effect of the jackpot game.

In step S1325, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of consecutive villas, which is the number of jackpot games that occurred while the time-saving gaming state (including the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state) continues. Is performed, and this command analysis process is terminated.

Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed during the normal gaming state, the number of consecutive villas is set to "1", and the jackpot game is performed during the time-saving gaming state (including the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state). When it is executed, a process of adding "1" to the number of consecutive villas is performed.

In step S1326, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command, it shifts the process to step S1327, and when it determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1328.

In step S1327, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern, which is an aspect of the round effect performed during the round of the jackpot game, and sets a round effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined round effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The round effect pattern determination process is performed, and this command analysis process is terminated. The round effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700, and the round effect of the jackpot game is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

In step S1328, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the ending designation command for the jackpot game (big hit game ending designation command). When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the jackpot game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1329, and when it determines that the command is not the jackpot game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends this command analysis process.

In step S1329, the sub CPU 102a determines an ending effect pattern, which is an effect mode of the ending effect performed during the ending of the jackpot game, and sets an ending effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined ending effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The jackpot game ending effect pattern determination process is performed, and this command analysis process is terminated. The ending effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700, and the ending effect of the jackpot game is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

(Holding information update processing of production control board)
The hold information update process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

In step S1305-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current number of special figure reservations stored in the effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1305-2, the first special symbol corresponds to the special symbol storage designation command. The figure hold number (U1) or the second special figure hold number (U2) is updated.

As shown in FIG. 49A, the effect information hold storage area includes a first special figure hold number storage area in which the first special figure hold number (U1) is stored and a second special figure hold number (U2). The second special figure reserved number storage area to be stored, the first effect information reserved storage area in which the effect information related to the look-ahead notice (effect) based on the result of the first prior determination is stored, and the result of the second prior determination. A second effect information hold storage area in which the effect information related to the look-ahead notice (effect) based on the above is stored, and an effect in which the effect information shifted from the first effect information hold storage area or the second effect information hold storage area is stored. Information Consists of the storage area.

The first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit like the first special figure hold storage area and the second special figure hold storage area of the main RAM 101c. Has been done. Further, the effect information storage area corresponds to the currently performed variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol, and is a storage area common to the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area. Therefore, for convenience, it is set as the 0th storage unit.

As shown in FIG. 49 (b), each storage unit has a start opening prize designation command area in which a start opening prize designation command is stored and a look-ahead zone described later as storage areas for effect information related to the look-ahead notice (effect). Look-ahead zone that represents the scenario of the production The look-ahead zone that stores the production scenario data, the precursory effect scenario area that stores the precursory effect scenario data that represents the scenario of the precursory effect described later, and the scenario of the icon display mode that will be described later. Icon display mode A scenario area for storing icon display mode scenario data is provided.

In step S1305-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of reserved special figures (U1, U2) has decreased, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, the process is transferred to step S1305-4. If it is determined that the number of reserved special figures has not decreased, the process proceeds to step S1305-8 assuming that the number of reserved special figures has increased.

In step S1305-4, the sub CPU 102a is stored in each storage unit of the effect information hold storage area corresponding to the type of the reduced special figure hold number (starting port) in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Shift the production information of.

Specifically, the effect information (data) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. For example, various effect information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information reservation storage area. Further, the effect information stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area is stored in the effect information common to the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area (the 0th storage area). Part). As a result, the effect information stored in the storage area is deleted.

In step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a issues a hold icon shift control command (first hold display shift control command or second hold display shift control command) indicating the type of the reduced special figure hold number (starting port) to the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer.

The hold icon shift control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon shift control command, the image control board 105 performs a shift process of shifting the hold icon related to the start port indicated by the received hold icon shift control command toward the changing icon display area described later.

In step S1305-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data (details will be described later) stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and is an icon that has already been displayed and is a hold icon to be performed. It is determined whether or not there is an icon that changes the display mode (executes the hold icon change notice) according to the shift (execution of the variation effect), and if it is determined that there is an icon that changes the display mode, step S1305- When the process is transferred to 7 and it is determined that there is no icon for changing the display mode, the pending information update process is terminated.

In step S1305-7, the sub CPU 102a sets in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c an icon change control command indicating the change content according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display mode scenario data related to the icon that changes the display mode. Here, the "change content according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display mode scenario data" includes an icon for which the display mode is changed and a display mode to be changed.

The icon change control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the icon shift control command, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of the icon according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received icon change control command together with the shift of the hold icon related to the hold icon shift process.

In step S1305-8, the sub CPU 102a adds a hold icon based on the increase in the number of special figure holds, and sends a hold icon addition control command indicating the type of the increased number of special figure holds (starting port) to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set and end the pending information update process.

The hold icon addition control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon addition control command, the image control board 105 additionally displays the hold icon corresponding to the start port indicated by the received hold addition control command.

(Explanation of look-ahead zone production, icon display, icon display area)
Before explaining the start opening winning process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, first, the look-ahead zone effect, the hold icon display, the changing icon display, etc., which are performed based on the pre-judgment result and the like indicated by the starting opening winning designation command, will be described. I will do it.

(Look-ahead zone production)
First, the look-ahead zone effect will be described. The look-ahead zone effect suggests that the expectation (expected value) of winning the jackpot is high over one or more variable effects (variable display of special symbols) (expecting the execution of a special game). It is a look-ahead notice effect, and in the present embodiment, it can be executed in the effect mode A set in the normal gaming state, and is performed based on the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command.

While the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the zone background image dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 (there is a part not shown), and the zone BGM dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect is output as audio. It is output from the device 15, and the zone lighting dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect is executed in the effect lighting device 16. It should be noted that the zone background image, the zone BGM, and the zone lighting can be collectively referred to as a zone effect.

Further, as an effect related to the look-ahead zone effect, a zone fanning effect is provided. The zone fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed, and in the variable display and stop display of the effect symbol, a special effect symbol dedicated to the zone fanning effect (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol") is used. It is done using. In the present embodiment, the zone fanning effect is performed using a special pattern, but it is not a dedicated effect symbol for the zone fanning effect, but it is also possible to use a special effect symbol different from the usual one. There is also a possibility that the chance eye (combination of predetermined production symbols) is stopped and displayed by a normal production symbol. Further, the zone fanning effect can be performed by using another effect image (character or the like) instead of the effect symbol, and another effect device other than the image display device 14 (for example, an audio output device 15 or an effect) can be used. It is also possible to perform the effect by causing a lighting device 16 or the like to perform an effect of a predetermined mode.

In the present embodiment, as the types of the zone fanning effect, the zone fanning success effect and the zone fanning failure effect are provided. The zone fanning success effect is composed of an effect of inciting whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed and an effect of notifying that the look-ahead zone effect is executed after the effect. In the zone fanning success effect, it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is executed by displaying or temporarily stopping a plurality of preset special symbols and aligning all the preset special symbols. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect is executed from the start of the variable display (including the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect) of the effect symbol that is started after the zone fanning success effect is executed.

On the other hand, the zone fanning failure effect is composed of an effect of inciting whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed and an effect of notifying that the look-ahead zone effect after the effect is not executed. In the zone fanning failure effect, only a part of a plurality of preset special symbols is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed because all the preset special symbols are not aligned. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect is not executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (including the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect) that is started after the zone fanning failure effect is executed. However, it is possible to execute the zone fanning success effect in the variable display of the effect symbol (including the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect) that is started after the zone fanning failure effect is executed. The look-ahead zone effect is executed from the start of the variable display (including the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect) of the effect symbol that is started after the zone fanning success effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, as the special symbol used for the zone fanning effect, a special symbol including the character "look-ahead" (referred to as "look-ahead" symbol) and a special symbol including the character "zone" ("zone"). A special symbol (called a "rush" symbol) containing the characters "rush" is set. The zone fanning effect in which all the special symbols of these "look-ahead" symbols, "zone" symbols, and "rush" symbols are stopped and displayed is the "zone fanning success effect", and these "look-ahead" symbols and "zone" symbols And the zone fanning effect in which some special symbols of the "rush" symbol are stopped and displayed is the "zone fanning failure effect". The zone fanning failure effect is the zone fanning failure effect 1 in which the "look-ahead" symbol and the "zone" symbol are stopped and displayed as some special symbols, and the zone in which only the "look-ahead" symbol is stopped and displayed as some special symbols. It consists of a fanning failure production 2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbols are stopped one by one. For example, in the zone fanning success production, the "look-ahead" symbol stops first, then the "zone" symbol stops, and finally the "rush" symbol stops while decelerating, and then "rushes". All special symbols are aligned by stopping the symbols at the preset stop position. Then, the period from the first stop of the "look-ahead" symbol to the final stop of the "rush" symbol constitutes an effect of whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the zone fanning failure effect, for example, the "look-ahead" symbol stops first, then the "zone" symbol stops, and finally the "rush" symbol stops while decelerating. , Sliding past a preset stop position, resulting in only some special symbols. The period from the first stop of the "look-ahead" symbol to the slipping of the "rush" symbol constitutes an effect of whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, as the mode of "all special symbols are aligned", the "look-ahead" symbol, the "zone" symbol, and the "rush" symbol are gradually stopped, but all these special symbols are aligned at the same time. In other words, it is also possible to suddenly align all the special symbols without executing the effect of whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

(Icon display)
Next, the hold icon display and the changing icon display will be described. The hold icon display is to display the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 141 and the second hold icon display area 143, which will be described later. As for the hold icon, the special symbol determination information is stored in the main RAM 101c in the first start port detection signal input process in step S230 or the second start port detection signal input process in step S240, and the special symbol variation display (or special symbol lottery) is performed. ), But the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol in the pending state because it is in a pending state where the variable display of the special symbol cannot be started immediately (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol pending"). ), Which is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

The hold icons are the first hold icon representing the right to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 6, and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 7. Includes a second hold icon representing the right to execute (hereinafter, when both the first hold icon and the second hold icon are referred to, it is simply referred to as a "hold icon").

The changing icon display is to display the changing icon in the changing icon display area 142, which will be described later. The changing icon is an icon (image) representing the changing display of the special symbol being executed corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in the storage area of the special symbol of the main RAM 101c, and is the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Is displayed in. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed and the start condition for the variable display of the symbol is satisfied for the special figure hold indicated by the hold icon, the variable display of the symbol related to the establishment of the start condition is supported. The hold icon is displayed as a fluctuating icon.

In the following, when both the hold icon and the changing icon are referred to, they are simply referred to as "icons".

In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a special mode are set as the display mode of the icon. The normal mode is a standard display mode for an icon, and the special mode is a special display mode that suggests or informs a predetermined predetermined item set in advance. In the present embodiment, one type of normal mode is set, and the special mode is classified into a plurality of types according to the content to be suggested or notified. In the present embodiment, the special aspects are classified into the first special aspect, the second special aspect, the third special aspect, and the fourth special aspect, and the hold icon is displayed in the special aspect or the type of the special aspect is displayed. By changing, the hold icon change notice as a look-ahead notice effect is executed, and the changing icon change notice is executed by displaying the changing icon in a special mode or changing the type of the special mode. The display mode of the icon is not limited to these normal modes, the first special mode, the second special mode, the third special mode, and the fourth special mode, and can be appropriately set.

The normal mode is a standard display mode and serves as a reference for preset predetermined items. As shown in FIG. 61, the icon of the normal mode has a circular shape, and the color of the icon of the normal mode is white.

The first special aspect is a display mode that suggests the possibility of winning a big hit and / or the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, and can be said to be a display mode that suggests that the game may change to another special mode. In this embodiment, only one type is set. As shown in FIG. 61, the icon of the first special aspect has a circular shape, and the color of the icon of the first special aspect is blinking white. That is, it can be said that the first special mode is a state in which the normal mode is blinking. Regarding the jackpot winning expectation degree suggested by the first special aspect, the normal aspect <the first special aspect.

The second special aspect is a display mode that suggests the possibility of winning a big hit and / or the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. 5 types of the second special aspect 21 to the second special aspect 25 are set.

As shown in FIG. 61, the icons of the second special aspect 11 to the second special aspect 15 are the same in the silhouette of one person regardless of the type, and the second special aspect 11 to the second special aspect are the same. The colors of the 15 icons differ depending on the type. Specifically, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 11 is white, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 12 is green, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 13 is red, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 14 is. Is a zebra pattern, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 15 is rainbow color.

Regarding the degree of expectation of winning a big hit according to the second special aspect, the normal aspect <first special aspect <second special aspect 11 <second special aspect 12 <second special aspect 13 <second special aspect 14 <second special aspect 15 It is higher in the order of. The second special aspect 15 suggests that the jackpot winning expectation is 100%, that is, notifies the jackpot winning.

Further, the second special aspect 11 to the second special aspect 14 can occur for any of the hold icon and the changing icon, but the second special aspect 15 occurs only for the changing icon. This is because the hold icon indicating the special figure hold is displayed in the second special aspect 15, and if the jackpot winning is notified at the stage where the variable display of the special symbol related to the special figure hold has not started, the interest of the game is lowered. Since there is a risk, the second special aspect 15 is not generated for the hold icon. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special aspect 15.

It should be noted that the normal mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode are not common to the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (including the high-accuracy time-saving and the low-accuracy time-saving), but the normal mode for the time-saving gaming state (including the high-accuracy time-saving and the low-accuracy time-saving). For example, the icon shape is a square and the icon color is blue), the first special mode for the time-saving game state (for example, the icon shape is a square and the icon color is blinking blue), and the time-saving game state. The second special aspect (for example, the shape of the icon is a square and the color of the icon is the same) may be set. Further, the normal mode and the first special mode may be different between the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state.

The third special aspect suggests the degree of expectation for the execution of the look-ahead zone effect (hereinafter, referred to as "pre-reading zone execution expectation degree"). As the type of the third special aspect, six types of the third special aspect 1 to the third special aspect 6 in which the suggested pre-reading effect execution expectation degree is different are set.

Here, in the third special aspect 1 to the third special aspect 3, the icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command for executing the look-ahead zone effect or the zone fanning effect (hereinafter referred to as “zone effect target icon”). The third special aspect 4 to the third special aspect 6 are icons that are not icons corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that causes the look-ahead zone effect or the zone fanning effect to be executed (hereinafter, “zone”). It is a display mode of "effect non-target icon"). In other words, the zone effect non-target icon is the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that is to execute the look-ahead zone effect or the zone fanning effect (before). Or an icon) in which a variable effect is executed later.

As shown in FIG. 62, the icon of the third special aspect 1 to the third special aspect 3 is a figure including the icon of the second special aspect. Specifically, in the icon of the third special aspect 1 (11 to 15), the silhouette of one person is arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. At the same time, the character "? Zone?", Which suggests the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, is attached to the central part. The icon of the third special aspect 2 (21 to 25) has the silhouettes of two people arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect, and is substantially in the center. Is composed of "△ zone △", which is an execution of the look-ahead zone effect and a character suggesting that the expected degree of the execution is higher than that of "? Zone?" In the third special aspect 1. The icon of the third special aspect 3 (31 to 35) has the silhouettes of four people arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect, and is substantially in the center. Is composed of a character "○ zone ○" that notifies the execution of the look-ahead zone effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the icon of the third special aspect 4 to the third special aspect 6 also has a shape including the icon of the second special aspect. Specifically, in the icon of the third special aspect 4 (41 to 45), the silhouette of one person is arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. It is composed. The icon of the third special aspect 5 (51 to 55) has a configuration in which the silhouettes of two people are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. .. The icon of the third special aspect 6 (61 to 65) has a configuration in which the silhouettes of three people are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. .. In the third special aspect 4 to the third special aspect 6, characters such as "? Zone?" Are not added as in the third special aspect 1 to the third special aspect 3. That is, it is also suggested that the "? Zone?" In the third special aspect 1, the "△ zone △" in the third special aspect 2, and the "○ zone ○" in the third special aspect 3 are zone production target icons, respectively. ing.

The pre-reading zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect target icon is higher in the order of (normal aspect <) second special aspect <third special aspect 1 <third special aspect 2 <third special aspect 3. On the other hand, the pre-reading zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect non-target icon increases in the order of (normal aspect <) second special aspect <third special aspect 4 <third special aspect 5 <third special aspect 6. There is.

Here, the reason why the second special mode is included with respect to the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect target icon and the zone effect non-target icon is that the display mode of the icon is set to the second special mode and the third special mode. This is because the zone precursor effect that suggests or notifies the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the second special aspect also suggests the read-ahead zone execution expectation level.

As described above, the iconic figures of the second special aspect and the third special aspect include the silhouette of a person, the number of silhouettes of the icon of the second special aspect is "1", and the third special aspect 1 The number of silhouettes of the icons of 4 is "3", the number of silhouettes of the icons of the third special modes 2 and 5 is "5", and the number of silhouettes of the icons of the third special modes 3 and 6 is "5". Is "7" people. And, the larger the number of icon silhouettes, the higher the expectation of pre-reading zone execution.

Further, in the present embodiment, the third special aspect 1 and the third special aspect 4, the third special aspect 2 and the third special aspect 5, and the third special aspect 3 and the third special aspect 6 are each the display mode. It is assumed that the attributes of the icons targeted for are different (zone effect target icon and zone effect non-target icon), but they are in a corresponding relationship and the same look-ahead zone execution expectation is set. That is, the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 1 and the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 4 are the same, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree and the first look-ahead zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 2 are the same. 3 The look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the special aspect 5 is the same, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 3 and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 6 are the same. ..

Further, the third special aspects 3 and 6 suggest that the read-ahead zone execution expectation degree is 100%, that is, notify that the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Further, although the details will be described later, the icon is displayed in the third special modes 3 and 6 even when the look-ahead zone effect is being executed. Therefore, the third special aspects 3 and 6 may notify that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed.

In the following, the third special aspects 1 and 4 will be referred to as "look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1", and the third special aspects 2 and 5 will be referred to as "look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2". Aspects 3 and 6 are referred to as a "look-ahead zone effect notification mode". Further, when both the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 and the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 are referred to, it is simply referred to as a "look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode".

Further, as described above, the shape of the icon according to the third special aspect is composed of the silhouette of a person, and includes the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. The silhouette part of one person according to the above is the main silhouette part, and the silhouette part of the person on the left side and the right side of the main silhouette part is the sub-silhouette part.

As for the main silhouette portion of the icon according to each of the third special aspect 1 to the third special aspect 6, a plurality of kinds of colors are set as in the second special aspect. The third special aspect 1 is divided into the third special aspect 11 to the third special aspect 15, and the third special aspect 2 is divided into the third special aspect 21 to the third special aspect 25 according to the color of the main silhouette portion. , The third special aspect 3 is divided into the third special aspect 31 to the third special aspect 35, the third special aspect 4 is divided into the third special aspect 41 to the third special aspect 45, and the third special aspect 5 is the first. The third special aspect 51 to the third special aspect 55 are divided, and the third special aspect 6 is divided into the third special aspect 61 to the third special aspect 65.

The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 11, the third special aspect 21, the third special aspect 31, the third special aspect 41, the third special aspect 51, and the third special aspect 61 is white. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 12, the third special aspect 22, the third special aspect 32, the third special aspect 42, the third special aspect 52, and the third special aspect 62 is green. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 13, the third special aspect 23, the third special aspect 33, the third special aspect 43, the third special aspect 53, and the third special aspect 63 is red. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 14, the third special aspect 24, the third special aspect 34, the third special aspect 44, the third special aspect 54, and the third special aspect 64 is a zebra pattern. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 35 and the third special aspect 65 is rainbow color. As in the second special mode, the color of the main silhouette portion of the third special mode suggests the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, and the colors are higher in the order of white <green <red <zebra pattern <rainbow color.

On the other hand, the fourth special aspect suggests or informs a predetermined matter regarding the handshake event notice. The handshake event notice is an effect that suggests the expectation of winning a big hit by using a changing icon. In this embodiment, it can be executed in the effect mode A, and is based on the preliminary judgment result indicated by the start opening prize designation command. However, it may be performed based on the determination result at the start of the variation effect. The specific content of the handshake event notice will be described later.

As the type of the fourth special aspect, four types of the fourth special aspect 1 to the fourth special aspect 4 are set. Here, in the fourth special aspect 1 (11 to 15), the changing icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that causes the handshake event notice to be executed (hereinafter, referred to as “the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice”). The fourth special aspect 2 (21 to 24) is a hold icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that causes the handshake event notice to be executed (hereinafter referred to as “handshake meeting notice target hold icon”). ), And the fourth special aspect 3 (31) is a changing icon corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command that is not the starting opening winning designation command that was to execute the handshake event notice (hereinafter, “handshake”). It is a display mode of "Icon that is not subject to meeting notice"), and the fourth special mode 4 (41) corresponds to the starting mouth winning designation command that is not the starting opening winning designation command that was to execute the handshake meeting notice. This is a display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “handshake event notice non-target hold icon”).

In other words, the handshake event notice non-target hold icon is the icon (before or after) corresponding to the start opening prize designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that caused the handshake event notice to be executed. It is an icon) on which a variable effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 64, the figure of the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 1 (11 to 15) is a silhouette of a person shaking hands seen from the side and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. It is composed of and. The shape of the hold icon in the fourth special aspect 2 (21 to 24) is composed of a silhouette of a person in a predetermined pose viewed from the front and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. The "heart" commonly attached to the icons of the fourth special aspect 1 and the fourth special aspect 2 indicates that the handshake event is subject to notice.

Further, the figure of the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 3 (31) is composed of the silhouette of the same person as the changing icon according to the fourth special aspect 1, and the heart is as in the fourth special aspect 1. Not attached. The shape of the hold icon in the fourth special aspect 4 (41) is also composed of the silhouette of the same person as the hold icon according to the fourth special aspect 2, and the heart is not attached as in the fourth special aspect 2. ..

Further, as in the case of the second special aspect, a plurality of kinds of colors are set for the silhouette portion of the person included in the icons of the fourth special aspect 1 to the fourth special aspect 2. The fourth special aspect 1 is divided into five types of the fourth special aspect 11 to the fourth special aspect 15 according to the color of the silhouette portion, and the fourth special aspect 2 is the fourth special aspect 21 to the fourth special aspect 24. It is divided into four types.

The color of the icon silhouette portion according to the fourth special aspect 11 and the fourth special aspect 21 is white, the color of the icon silhouette portion according to the fourth special aspect 12 and the fourth special aspect 22 is green, and the fourth. The color of the icon silhouette portion according to the special aspect 13 and the fourth special aspect 23 is red, the color of the icon silhouette portion according to the fourth special aspect 14 and the fourth special aspect 24 is a zebra pattern, and the fourth special aspect. The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to the aspect 15 is rainbow color.

The reason why the rainbow color is set only in the fourth special aspect 1 is that the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed in rainbow color, and the variable display of the special symbol related to the special figure hold corresponding to the changing icon has started. This is because if the jackpot winning is notified at a stage that is not present, the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and it is possible to provide a rainbow-colored display mode for the hold icon subject to the handshake event notice.

Further, in the present embodiment, the color related to the handshake event notice non-target changing icon and the handshake event notice non-target pending icon is one type of white, but a plurality of types are set and the handshake event notice target is changing. Similar to the icon and the handshake event notice pending icon, the color can indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit.

As described above, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the display mode of the icon, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode and from a certain special mode to a different special mode during the game. By doing so, the interest of the game is improved. The change pattern of the icon display mode will be described later.

(Icon display area)
Next, the hold icon display areas 141 and 143 for displaying the hold icon and the changing icon display area 142 for displaying the changing icon will be described. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the hold icon display areas 141 and 143 and the changing icon display area 142 are formed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

The first hold icon display area 141 on which the first hold icon is displayed is formed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and the second hold icon display area 143 on which the second hold icon is displayed is on the lower right side of the display unit 140. The changing icon display area 142 formed in the above and displaying the changing icon is formed between the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143 so as not to overlap each other.

The first reserved icon display area 141 is divided into a first display unit 141a, a second display unit 141b, a third display unit 141c, and a fourth display unit 141d from the side of the changing icon display area 142. Each display unit 141a to 141d corresponds to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c.

Therefore, the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 141a represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the second display unit 141b. The first hold icon displayed on the above represents a special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the third display unit 141c. The icon represents a special symbol hold based on the special symbol determination information stored in the third storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 141d is the first special symbol. Represents a special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the hold storage area.

The second hold icon display area 143 is divided into a first display unit 143a, a second display unit 143b, a third display unit 143c, and a fourth display unit 143d from the side of the changing icon display area 142. Each display unit 143a to 143d corresponds to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c.

Therefore, the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 143a represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second display unit 143b. The second hold icon displayed on represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the third display unit 143c. The icon represents a special symbol hold based on the special symbol determination information stored in the third storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 143d is the second special symbol. Represents a special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the hold storage area.

Further, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 represents the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed based on the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit). ..

The changing icon display area 142 on which the changing icon is displayed is provided on the pedestal image D in order to clearly distinguish it from the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143. It should be noted that the broken line portion in FIG. 78A is for indicating each display portion and the display area, and is not actually displayed, but may be displayed.

(Processing at the time of winning the start opening by the production control board)
With reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, a process at the time of winning a start opening by the effect control board 102 will be described.

In step S1307-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning designation command determined to have been received in step S1304 in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

Specifically, if the received start opening prize designation command is the first start opening winning designation command, the number of first special figure reservations among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first effect information reservation storage area ( It is stored in the storage unit corresponding to U1). Further, if the received start opening winning designation command is the second starting opening winning designation command, the number of reserved special figures (U2) in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second effect information reservation storage area is set. It is stored in the corresponding storage unit.

In step S1307-2, the sub CPU 102a acquires the icon display mode scenario determination random number indicated by the icon display mode scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1307-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A, which is a normal effect mode, is currently set. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is not set in step S1307-3, the process shifts to step S1307-4, and when it is determined in step S1307-3 that the effect mode A is set, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1307-5. Move the process.

In step S1307-5, the sub CPU 102a executes the zone precursor effect, in other words, whether or not the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time is the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode. Determine if it is.

The zone precursor effect is an effect for suggesting or notifying the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in the above-mentioned look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode. It is determined whether or not to execute the zone precursor effect based on the pre-judgment result indicated by the start opening prize designation command, and when the start opening prize designation command is stored, in other words, the start opening prize designation command is used. It can be executed from the time when the corresponding special figure hold occurs to the end of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure hold.

Even if the zone precursor effect is executed, the look-ahead zone effect may not be executed. In the following, the zone precursor effect in this case is referred to as "Gase zone precursor effect". Further, as the gasse zone precursor effect, the zone fanning failure effect is executed after the zone precursor effect is executed, but the look-ahead zone effect may not be executed. Further, although the zone precursor effect is executed as the gasse zone precursor effect, neither the zone fanning effect nor the look-ahead zone effect may be executed.

In step S1307-5, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time is the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode. If a new hold icon is displayed when it is displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode and the zone precursor effect is being executed, the new hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the already displayed look-ahead zone effect notification mode. This is to display in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode.

By displaying the new hold icon in the same display mode as the already displayed look-ahead zone effect notification mode or look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, the player is surely recognized the notification or suggestion of the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. be able to. Whether or not the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time is the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode is determined by the precursor effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c. Can be determined based on.

When the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1307-5 that the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time is displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307-6. If it is determined that the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time is not the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, the process is transferred to step S1307-7.

In step S1307-6, the sub CPU 102a displays the hold icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command related to the main start opening winning process in the same type as the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time. (The read-ahead zone effect notification mode, the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2) is set, and the zone precursor effect icon effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The zone precursor effect icon effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command for the zone precursor effect, the image control board 105 displays the hold icon corresponding to the start port prize designation command related to the start port winning process, which is already displayed at the present time. By displaying in the same type of display mode (look-ahead zone effect notification mode, look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 or look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2) as in (look-ahead zone effect notification mode or look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode), the zone precursor effect can be displayed. conduct.

In addition, the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that triggers the execution of the zone precursor effect ends, and the zone effect target icon (variation) displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode. When the middle icon) is deleted, the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode becomes the normal mode.

In step S1307-10, the sub CPU 102a sets the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start port prize designation command related to the start port prize designation command to the normal mode, and basically does not change to the special mode thereafter. The normal icon display mode scenario data indicating the normal icon display mode scenario is stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit in which the start opening winning designation command is stored in step S1305-1.

Here, "basically" means, as described above, when the zone precursor effect is executed when the icon is displayed in the normal mode, it is usually according to the execution. This is because the mode changes to the look-ahead zone effect execution suggestion mode or the look-ahead zone effect execution notification mode.

Further, for the same start opening winning designation command, in other words, in the same starting opening winning process, an icon effect control command indicating a normal icon display mode scenario described later is set (step S1307-22). When the icon effect control command for zone precursor effect is set (step S1307-6), the icon display control command is first transmitted to the image control board 105 and the lamp control board 104. Therefore, in this case, after the hold icon of the normal mode is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon immediately changes to the look-ahead zone effect execution suggestion mode or the look-ahead zone effect execution notification mode.

In step S1307-7, the sub CPU 102a has a look-ahead zone effect, a zone fanning effect, or a zone precursor effect based on the look-ahead zone effect scenario data and the precursor effect scenario data stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not any of the above (hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead zone effect, etc.") has not been executed at the present time, but is already planned to be executed. The reason for making such a determination is to prevent duplicate execution of the look-ahead zone effect and the like.

When the sub CPU 102a determines that the look-ahead zone effect or the like is scheduled to be executed, the process is transferred to step S1307-10, and when it is determined that the look-ahead zone effect or the like is not scheduled to be executed, the sub CPU 102a performs the process in step S1307-8. Move.

In step S1307-8, the sub CPU 102a determines that the jackpot determination related to the currently executed variation effect is "big hit" based on the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c described later. It is determined whether or not it is. The variable effect data is identification information indicating the effect content of the variable effect, but the variable effect data also includes a jackpot determination result that triggers the execution of the variable effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a "big hit", it shifts the process to step S1307-10, and if it determines that it is not a "big hit", it shifts the process to step S1307-9.

In step S1307-9, the sub CPU 102a is selected from the start opening winning designation command related to the main starting opening winning process among the starting opening winning designation commands currently stored in the first effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not all the pre-determination results related to the first special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as "advance hold") corresponding to the start opening winning designation command stored in advance are "loss without reach". When the sub CPU 102a determines that all are "loss without reach", the process is transferred to step S1307-11, and when it is determined that all are not "loss without reach", the process is transferred to step S1307-10.

In step S1307-11, the sub CPU 102a acquires the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination random number indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1307-12, the sub CPU 102a selects a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 50) for performing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination, and the pre-reading acquired in step S1307-11 to the selected determination table. The look-ahead zone effect scenario determination is performed to determine the look-ahead zone effect scenario by collating the random numbers for zone effect scenario determination.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario means the effect contents of the zone fanning effect and the look-ahead zone effect. The contents of the zone fanning effect and the look-ahead zone effect include whether or not the fanning effect can be executed, the timing at which the fanning effect is executed when the fanning effect is executed, the type of the fanning effect to be executed, and the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. Whether or not the look-ahead zone is executed, and the timing at which the look-ahead zone effect is executed when the look-ahead zone is executed are included.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 50 is associated with the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main start opening winning process, and the current number of reserved first special figures (U1). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the look-ahead zone effect determination table, the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main start opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c, and the sub RAM 102c are the first. 1 The number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the effect information hold storage area (first storage unit to fourth storage unit), that is, the first special figure hold number (U1) is referred to.

Further, in each look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special figure hold number (U1), the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination value and the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination value are set so as to be the selection rate (%) for each scenario. It is stored in association with the look-ahead zone effect scenario.

In addition, "the change", "1 before change", "2 before change" and "3 before change" described in the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table are the look-ahead zone effect, the fanning success effect, the fanning failure effect 1 or It represents the timing at which the fanning failure effect 2 is executed. Here, "the fluctuation" represents the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening prize designation command related to the processing at the time of winning the starting opening (hereinafter referred to as "the fluctuation"), and "1 before the change" is the relevant. "2 before the change" represents the change display of the special symbol two before the change, and "3 before the change" indicates the change. It shows the variable display of the special symbol three times before it is performed.

When the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination is performed in step S1307-12, the sub CPU 102a stores the look-ahead zone effect scenario data indicating the look-ahead zone effect scenario, which is the determination result, in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. .. The look-ahead zone effect scenario data is stored in the look-ahead zone effect scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit in which the start opening winning designation command is stored in step S1307-1.

In step S1307-13, the sub CPU 102a is a look-ahead zone effect scenario in which the result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12 includes execution of the zone fanning effect regardless of whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Whether or not, in other words, whether or not to execute the zone fanning effect based on the start opening prize designation command related to the start opening winning process is determined. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone fanning effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step S1307-14, and when it is determined that the zone fanning effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307-4.

In step S1307-14, the sub CPU 102a is a random number counter for determining the final number of people provided in the sub RAM 102c in order to determine the final number of people related to the zone precursor effect icon (hereinafter, simply referred to as “final number of people”). Acquires the random number for determining the final number of people indicated by.

In step S1307-15, the sub CPU 102a selects a final number determination table for determining the final number of people, and collates the selected table with a random number for determining the final number of people acquired in step S1305-14 to determine the final number of people. Determine the final number of people.

The final number of people is the number of people who make up the icon used for the zone precursor effect, and is the number of people who will finally reach it. The reason why it is "final" is that the production mode of the zone precursor effect, in other words, the number of people constituting the icon used for the zone precursor effect (icon display mode) can change on the way. be. In the present embodiment, the final number of people is set to four types of 1, 3, 5, and 7, and this "1 person" corresponds to the second special aspect, and "3 people" is the first. 3 Corresponding to the special aspect 1, "5 persons" corresponds to the third special aspect 2, and "7 persons" corresponds to the third special aspect 3. That is, determining the final number of people can also be said to determine the final display mode of the icon for the zone precursor effect.

The final number determination table shown in FIG. 51 is associated with the look-ahead zone effect scenario determined in the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination. In each final number determination table associated with the look-ahead zone effect scenario, the final number determination value and the final number of people are stored in association with each other so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 51. Therefore, when selecting the final number determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

Further, the "precursor effect scenario determination TBL.No" described in the final number of people determination table is the identification information of the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination described later, and is the identification information of the precursor effect scenario determination table in the present start opening winning process. The judgment result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario judgment and the judgment result of the final number of people judgment are associated with each other. Therefore, the final number of people is determined in the final number of people determination, and the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination is determined.

In step S1307-16, the sub CPU 102a acquires a zone precursor effect scenario determination random number indicated by the zone precursor effect scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c in order to determine the zone precursor effect scenario.

The zone precursor effect scenario means the effect content of the zone precursor effect. The content of the zone precursor effect includes whether or not the zone precursor effect can be executed, and the icon display mode when the zone precursor effect is executed is either the second special mode or the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3. The timing of the change and the icon display mode (the number of people constituting the icon) after the change when the change is made are included.

In step S1307-17, the sub CPU 102a selects a zone precursor effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining a zone precursor effect scenario, and uses the selected determination table as the zone acquired in step S1307-16. The zone precursor effect scenario determination is performed to determine the zone precursor effect scenario by collating the random numbers for determining the precursor effect scenario.

As described above, the zone precursor effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is a precursor effect scenario determination TBL in which the determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination in the present start opening winning process are associated with each other. It is associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the zone precursor effect scenario determination table, the precursor effect scenario determination TBL. Refer to No.

"At the time of winning", "3 before change → 2 before change" and "2 before change → 1 before change" described in the zone precursor effect scenario judgment table are the timings that are the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect. Represents. Here, "at the time of winning" represents the time when the special figure hold corresponding to the start opening winning designation command related to the processing at the time of winning the main starting opening occurs, and "3 before change → 2 before change" means that the change is performed. It represents the period from the end of the variation display of the 3rd previous special symbol to the start of the variation display of the 2nd previous special symbol (when the hold icon is shifted), and "2 before change → 1 before change" means It represents the period from the end of the variation display of the special symbol two before the change to the start of the variation display of the previous special symbol (when the hold icon is shifted).

In addition, in FIG. 52, "at the time of winning", "3 before change → 2 before change" and "2 before change → 1 before change" are provided as the timing of the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect. In this embodiment, the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes is "at the time of winning", "4 before change → 3 before change", and "3 before change → 2 before change". And "2 before change → 1 before change", and the zone precursor effect scenario determination table used when the zone precursor effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is the first special figure hold number "3". Therefore, only "at the time of winning", "3 before change → 2 before change", and "2 before change → 1 before change" can occur.

In the zone precursor effect scenario determination table used in the case of the first special figure hold number "4", the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes is "at the time of winning" and "before 4 changes →". In the precursor effect scenario judgment table used when "3 before change", "3 before change → 2 before change" and "2 before change → 1 before change" are set and the first special figure hold number is "2", the zone is set. As the timing when the number of people constituting the icon related to the precursor effect changes, "at the time of winning" and "2 before change → 1 before change" are set, and the precursor effect scenario used when the first special figure hold number "1" is set. In the determination table, "at the time of winning" is set as the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes.

Further, in FIG. 52, the numbers "1", "3", "5" and "7" described at the bottom of the column of the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes are at that timing. It shows that the icon changes to a display mode composed of the number of people.

Therefore, for example, in the precursory effect scenario 17-1, the display mode of the hold icon generated at the time of winning and the icon displayed at that time is the display mode (second special mode) consisting of the number of people "1 person", and "3. In "Before change → 2 Before change", the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is the display mode consisting of "3 people" (3rd special mode 1), and in "2 Before change → 1 Before change", The display mode of the icon displayed at that time represents the production content of the zone precursor effect, which is the display mode consisting of the number of people "5 people" (third special mode 2).

When the zone precursor effect scenario determination is performed in step S1307-17, the sub CPU 102a stores the zone precursor effect scenario data indicating the zone precursor effect scenario, which is the determination result, in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. .. The storage of the zone precursor effect scenario data is performed in the zone precursor effect scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit in which the start opening winning designation command is stored in step S1307-1.

In step S1307-18, the sub CPU 102a has a look-ahead zone effect scenario that is a determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12 and a zone precursor effect scenario that is a determination result of the zone precursor effect scenario determination in step S1307-17. A look-ahead zone effect control command indicating the effect content is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The read-ahead zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the read-ahead zone effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the zone precursor effect and the zone fanning according to the effect contents indicated by the zone precursor effect scenario and the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect control command. Controls the production and look-ahead zone production.

In step S1307-19, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12 is a look-ahead zone effect scenario including execution of the look-ahead zone effect, in other words, the start port. It is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead zone effect based on the start opening winning designation command related to the winning process. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1307-20, and the read-ahead zone effect is not executed, but the zone fanning effect is executed (hereinafter, the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, but the zone fanning effect is performed. If it is determined that the execution is referred to as "gase zone fanning effect"), the process is transferred to step S1307-21.

In step S1307-20, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 53) for executing a look-ahead zone effect scenario for determining an icon display mode scenario when executing the look-ahead zone effect, and selects the icon display mode scenario. The icon display mode scenario determination for determining the icon display mode scenario is performed by collating the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1307-2 with the determined determination table.

The icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect shown in FIG. 53 is a precursor effect scenario in which the determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number of people determination in the present start opening winning process are associated with each other. It is provided for each. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect, the sub CPU 102a refers to the precursor effect scenario indicated by the precursor effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

A plurality of icon display mode scenarios are provided in each icon display mode scenario determination table provided for each precursor effect scenario, and icon display mode scenario judgment values are appropriately assigned to each icon display mode scenario. ing.

In addition, "at the time of winning", "2 before change", "1 before change", and "the change" described in the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect indicate the timing at which the icon display mode changes. Represents. As described above, when the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the display mode of the displayed zone effect target icon is the third special mode 3, and the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon is the third special mode 6. ..

Further, even if the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, before the look-ahead zone effect is executed, the zone effect target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 1 and 2 as the zone precursor effect, and the zone effect is performed. The non-target icon becomes the second special aspect or the third special aspect 4, 5. Then, when the icon of the second special mode or the third special mode including the silhouette of the person is displayed in this way, the silhouette of the person constituting the changing icon (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode). The color of the can change.

For example, the “white → green” of “2 before change” in the icon display mode scenario “5” in FIG. 53 is the silhouette of the person constituting the icon displayed in white (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode). It shows that the color of is changed to green.

Similarly, in the icon display mode scenario "15" in FIG. 53, the "white-> green-> red-> zebra-> rainbow" of the "correspondence" is the silhouette of the person constituting the icon displayed in white (third). As for the special aspect, it shows that the color of the main silhouette part) changes stepwise in the order of green → red → zebra pattern → rainbow color.

It should be noted that the color change of the silhouette of the person constituting the icon (the main silhouette portion in the third special aspect) is appropriately performed according to the effect content of the variable effect being performed at that time. As the production content of the variable production for changing the color of the silhouette of a person, the temporary stop or re-variation of the pseudo-continuous production, or stepwise over one or multiple times during the variable production depending on the expectation of winning the jackpot. At the time of step-up of the so-called step-up notice that steps up the effect (effect image, effect sound, etc.), a predetermined cut-in notice that displays a cut-in image according to the expectation of the jackpot winning on the image display device 14, the jackpot winning A reach state is established when a dialogue notice, a character appears, or a development effect that develops into super reach is executed, in which a dialogue image is displayed on the image display device 14 and a dialogue sound is output from the voice output device 15 while displaying a dialogue image according to the degree of expectation of. At that time, a predetermined operation effect by the effect effect device 17 is appropriately set according to the variable effect at that time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the color of the silhouette of the person constituting the icon related to the icon display mode scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect (main silhouette portion for the third special mode) changes is the timing of the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to the above, and can be appropriately set when the icon shifts when a predetermined variation effect is completed and the next variation effect is started.

When the icon display mode scenario determination is performed in step S1307-20, the sub CPU 102a stores the icon display mode scenario data indicating the icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. .. The changing icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit in which the start opening winning designation command is stored in step S1307-1.

In step S1307-21, the sub CPU 102a shows the same normal icon display mode scenario as in step S1307-10 as the icon icon display mode scenario corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that triggers the execution of the gasse zone fanning effect. Normal icon display mode Scenario data is stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In the present embodiment, the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command, which is basically an opportunity to execute the Gasezone fanning effect, is a normal mode, but it is an opportunity to execute the Gasezone fanning effect. As for the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command, a judgment table similar to the icon display mode scenario judgment table for executing the look-ahead zone effect is provided, and step S1307-20 is based on the table. It is also possible to make a judgment in the same manner as the scenario judgment of the look-ahead zone effect icon display mode.

Here, "basically" means, as described above, when the zone precursor effect is executed when the icon is displayed in the normal mode, it is usually according to the execution. This is because the mode changes to the look-ahead zone effect execution suggestion mode or the look-ahead zone effect execution notification mode. The normal icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit in which the start opening winning designation command is stored in step S1307-1.

In step S1307-22, the sub CPU 102a sets the icon display control command indicated by the icon display mode scenario set in the icon display mode scenario area of the sub RAM 102c in the transmission buffer in the main start opening winning process, and sets the main start opening winning. End the time processing.

The icon display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. Upon receiving the icon display control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 display the icon according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the changing icon display control command.

In step S1307-4, the sub CPU 102a performs an icon display mode scenario determination process (icon display mode scenario determination process for not executing the fanning effect) when the zone fanning effect is not executed.

(Icon display mode scenario determination process for non-execution of fanning effect by effect control board)
Here, the icon display mode scenario determination process for non-execution of the fanning effect will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

In step S1307-4-1, the sub CPU 102a is currently a period during which the icon change notice prohibition period for making the icon display mode a special mode is prohibited, specifically, during the jackpot game, SPSP. During the reach production such as during reach or SP reach, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and the predetermined time before the stop display of the special symbol is performed (for example). It is determined whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has already been executed or is scheduled to be executed for the period of 10 seconds). When the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the icon change notice period, it shifts the process to step S1307-4-16, and when it determines that it is not the icon change notice period, it shifts the process to step S1307-4-2.

In step S1307-4-16, the sub CPU 102a stores the same normal icon display mode scenario data as the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in step S1307-10 in the effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit in which the start opening winning designation command is stored in step S1307-1.

In step S1307-4-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A, which is a normal effect mode, is currently set. This is because, in the present embodiment, the handshake event notice described later is performed only in the production mode A. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is set, the process shifts to step S1307-4-3, and when it determines that the effect mode A is not set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307-4-12.

In step S1307-4-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not all the preliminary determination results related to the advance hold are "loss without reach". When the sub CPU 102a determines that all are "loss without reach", the process is transferred to step S1307-4-4, and when it is determined that all are not "loss without reach", the process is transferred to step S1307-4-12.

The sub CPU 102a is indicated by a random number counter for handshake event notice execution determination provided in the sub RAM 102c in order to perform a handshake event notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the handshake event notice in step S1307-4-4. Get a random number for handshake event notice execution judgment.

The handshake event notice is a kind of notice effect that suggests the possibility of winning a big hit and / or the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, and is performed using the changing icon. In the handshake event notice, the changing icon subject to the notice is displayed in the fourth special aspect 1, and the person constituting the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 1 (hereinafter referred to as "handshake event hero"). A predetermined handshake character appearing in the vicinity of the icon display area 142, which is changing due to the execution of the handshake event notice, shakes hands. Then, when the handshake event hero and the handshake character are shaking hands, the color of the handshake event hero gradually changes when a predetermined line appears from the handshake character on the display unit 140. When the color of this handshake event hero gradually changes, then the color of the handshake event hero changes completely and the color change succeeds, and in the middle of the color change, it returns to the original color. The color change may fail.

The number of times a line appears in one handshake event notice (hereinafter referred to as "the number of lines") is set. In this embodiment, the number of dialogues is set to 4 types of 1 to 4 times.

In addition, a handshake event notice suggestion effect is provided in connection with the handshake event notice. The handshake event notice suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the handshake event notice will be executed. In the handshake event notice suggestion production, from the time it is decided to execute the handshake event notice until the handshake event notice starts, the handshake event notice target hold icon is set to the 4th special for the execution of the handshake event notice. It is executed by displaying in the second aspect, displaying the handshake event notice non-target changing icon in the fourth special aspect 3, and displaying the handshake event notice non-target hold icon in the fourth special aspect 4.

In step S1307-4-5, the sub CPU 102a selected the handshake event notice execution determination table (see FIG. 54) for determining the handshake event notice execution, and acquired the selected table in step S1307-4-4. The handshake event notice execution judgment is performed by collating the random numbers for the handshake event notice execution judgment and determining whether or not the handshake event can be executed.

The handshake event notice execution determination table shown in FIG. 54 is associated with the pre-determination result of the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main starting opening winning process. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the handshake event advance notice execution determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main starting opening winning processing, which is stored in the sub RAM 102c.

As shown in FIG. 54, in each handshake event notice execution determination table associated with the preliminary judgment result, the handshake event notice is executed depending on whether or not the handshake event notice is executed so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 54. Judgment values are associated and stored.

In step S1307-4-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the determination result of the handshake event notice execution determination in step S1307-4-5 is "execute the handshake event notice". When the sub CPU 102a determines that the handshake event notice is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1307-4-7, and when it determines that the handshake event notice is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307-4-12.

In step S1307-4-7, the sub CPU 102a determines the final display mode of the icon when the handshake event notice is executed, specifically, the final color of the handshake event notice hero constituting the changing icon for the handshake event notice target. Icon for handshake event notice provided in the sub RAM 102c In order to determine the final display mode of the icon, the icon for handshake event notice indicated by the random number counter for determining the final display mode is acquired.

In step S1307-4-8, the sub CPU 102a selects and selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 55) for handshake event notice for determining the icon final display mode determination for the handshake event notice. By collating the icon final display mode determination random number acquired in step S1307-4-7 with the table, the handshake event notice icon final display mode determination is performed to determine the icon final display mode for the handshake event notice.

The icon final display mode determination table for handshake event notice shown in FIG. 55 is associated with the pre-judgment result of the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main starting opening winning process, and the current number of reserved first special figures (U1). Has been done. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon final display mode determination table for the handshake event notice, the sub CPU 102a makes a preliminary determination indicated by the start opening winning designation command that is the target of the main starting opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c. Refer to the result and the number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the first effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

As shown in FIG. 55, a plurality of icon final display modes are provided in the icon final display mode determination table for the handshake event notice associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special figure hold number (U1). The icon final display mode determination value is associated and stored in each icon final display mode so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 55.

In addition, the "final color pattern" described in the icon final display mode determination table for the handshake event notice is used when selecting the dialogue count determination table used in the dialogue count determination described later, and at the time of winning the main start opening. This is identification information associated with the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command related to the process, the number of reserved first special figures, and the final display mode of the icon. Therefore, the icon final display mode is determined by the icon final display mode determination for the handshake event notice.

In step S1307-4-9, the sub CPU 102a determines the number of lines to determine the number of lines appearing in the handshake event notice, and the number of lines indicated by the random number counter for determining the number of lines provided in the sub RAM 102c. Obtain a random number for judgment.

In step S1307-4-10, the sub CPU 102a selects a dialogue count determination table (see FIG. 56) for handshake event notice for determining the number of dialogues, and uses the selected table in step S1307-4-9. By collating the acquired random numbers for determining the number of dialogues, the number of dialogues for determining the number of dialogues for the handshake event notice is determined.

The dialogue count determination table shown in FIG. 56 is a table for determining the dialogue count, and is associated with the final color pattern associated with the icon final display mode. Therefore, when selecting the dialogue count determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the final color pattern derived as the determination result of the icon final display mode determination for the handshake event notice in step S1307-4-8.

Each dialogue count determination table associated with the final color pattern is provided with a dialogue count, and the dialogue count determination value corresponds appropriately to each dialogue count so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 56 is obtained. It is attached and stored. Therefore, the number of dialogues is determined by the determination of the number of dialogues for the handshake event notice.

In step S1307-4-11, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table (see FIG. 57) for handshake event notice, and collates the final color pattern with the number of lines in the selected table. The icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the icon display mode when the handshake event notice is executed is determined.

The "icon display mode scenario determination TBL.No for handshake event notice" described in the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table shown in FIG. 57 is a handshake used in the icon display mode scenario determination for handshake event notice described later. This is the identification information of the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for the announcement of the meeting, and the final color pattern related to the determination of the number of dialogues is associated with the number of dialogues. Therefore, the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake event notice is determined by collating the final color pattern with the number of dialogues.

In step S1307-4-12, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for the handshake event notice for determining the icon display mode scenario when the handshake event notice is executed. By collating the selected determination table with the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1307-2, the handshake event notice icon display mode scenario determination is performed to determine the icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice.

The icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice shown in FIG. 58 is a table for determining the icon display mode scenario when the handshake event notice is executed, and the icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice TBL. It is associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice, the icon display mode scenario determination TBL for handshake event notice determined in step S1307-4-11. Refer to No.

As shown in FIG. 58, the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. The icon display mode scenario determination table for each handshake event notice associated with No is provided with an icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice, and each handshake event notice is provided so as to have a preset selection rate. The icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately associated and stored in the icon display mode scenario. In the present embodiment, the number of icon display mode scenarios provided in the icon display mode scenario determination table for each handshake event notice varies, and the number of icon display mode scenario determination tables for each handshake event notice varies. The icon display mode scenario judgment value is appropriately associated with the icon display mode scenario for each handshake event notice so that the selection rate of each icon display mode scenario provided in the middle icon display mode scenario judgment table becomes uniform. It is assumed that it has been done.

Note that FIG. 58 is an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake event notice. Icon display mode for handshake event notice "At the time of winning", "1 change before → the change", "the (line) first time", "the (line) second time", "the (line)" "3rd time (line)" and "4th time (line)" indicate the timing when the icon display mode changes due to the handshake event notice.

As described above, the number of lines that can appear from a predetermined character in one handshake event notice is 1 to 4, and "the (line) first time" indicates the appearance of the first line in the handshake event notice. "The (line) second time" represents the appearance of the second line in the handshake event notice, and "the (line) third time" represents the appearance of the third line in the handshake event notice. (Line) 4th "represents the appearance of the 4th line in the handshake event notice.

The "white" for "at the time of winning" shown in FIG. 58 indicates that when the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed at the time of winning, it is suddenly displayed in the white fourth special aspect 21. .. On the other hand, in the case of "white" for "1 before change → relevant change", the handshake event notice target hold icon displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, and the handshake event notice target is changing. When it becomes an icon, it indicates that the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice is displayed in the white fourth special aspect 11.

Further, the "-successful fanning" described in FIG. 58 means that the change to the color corresponding to the "-" of the "successful fanning" is successful, and the "failed fanning" is the "failure of fanning". It means that the change to the color that applies to "-" in "Successful fanning" fails, specifically, it tries to change to the color that applies to "-", but returns to the color before the change in the middle of the change. .. In this embodiment, the color change is performed from the lower end to the upper end of the handshake event notice hero.

For example, in the handshake event notice display mode scenario "120", the handshake event notice target hold icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the person part is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed. When the icon is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon for the handshake event notice, it becomes the changing icon for the handshake event notice in the fourth special mode 11 (the main character of the handshake event is white), and in the handshake event notice, With the appearance of the first dialogue, the color of the handshake event hero changed to green after the handshake event hero's color changed to green after the handshake event hero's color changed to green. With the appearance of the second dialogue, the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to red after the production was performed to see if the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to red. In addition, the color of the handshake event hero changed to the zebra pattern after the production of whether or not the color of the handshake event hero changed to the zebra pattern was performed, and with the appearance of the fourth dialogue, the handshake event hero's It shows the content of the handshake event where the color of the main character of the handshake event changes to rainbow color after the effect of inciting whether or not the color changes to rainbow color is performed.

Further, in the handshake event notice display mode scenario "122", the handshake event notice target hold icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the person part is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed. When the icon is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice, it becomes the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice in the fourth special aspect 12 (the main character of the handshake meeting is green), and in the handshake event notice, With the appearance of the first dialogue, the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to red after the production was performed to see if the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to red. In addition, after the color of the handshake event hero changed to the zebra pattern or not, the color of the handshake event hero returned to red without changing to the zebra pattern, triggered by the appearance of the third dialogue. , The color of the handshake event hero changed to red without changing to the zebra pattern after the zebra pattern was changed, and the color of the handshake event hero changed with the appearance of the fourth dialogue. It shows the content of the production in which the color of the main character of the handshake event changes to rainbow color after the effect of inciting whether or not it changes to rainbow color is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the handshake event notice icon display mode scenario in step S1307-4-12, the handshake event notice icon display mode scenario showing the handshake event notice icon display mode scenario showing the determination result. The data is stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The storage of the icon display mode scenario data for the handshake event notice is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit in which the start opening winning designation command is stored in step S1307-1.

In step S1307-4-13, the sub CPU 102a sets the final display mode of the icon (hereinafter referred to as “normal icon final display mode”) when the look-ahead zone effect or the like is not executed and the handshake event notice is not executed. In order to determine the final display mode of the normal icon to be determined, the random number for determining the final display mode of the normal icon indicated by the random number counter for determining the final display mode of the normal icon provided in the sub RAM 102c is acquired.

In step S1307-4-14, the sub CPU 102a selects a normal icon final display mode determination table for determining the normal icon final display mode, and uses the selected table in step S1307-4-13. The final display mode of the normal icon is determined by collating the acquired random numbers for determining the final display mode of the normal icon. The final display mode of the normal icon is determined.

The icon final display mode determination table for normal use is associated with the pre-judgment result of the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main start opening winning process, and the current number of reserved first special figures (U1) (FIG. 59). reference). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon final display mode determination table for normal use, the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main starting opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c, and Refer to the number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the first effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

As shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of icon final display modes are provided in the normal icon final display mode determination table associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special figure hold number (U1), and FIG. 59. The icon final display mode determination value is associated and stored in each icon final display mode so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in.

Further, the "normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL.No" described in the normal icon final display mode determination table of FIG. 59 is when selecting the normal icon display mode scenario determination table described later. Used for. Therefore, in the icon final display mode determination for normal use, the icon final display mode is determined and the icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use is determined.

The sub CPU 102a is a normal icon display mode scenario determination table for determining an icon display mode scenario when the look-ahead zone effect or the like is not executed and the handshake event notice is not executed in step S1307-4-15 (FIG. 60) is selected, and the normal icon display mode scenario determination for determining the normal icon display mode scenario is performed by collating the selected table with the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1307-2. conduct.

The normal icon display mode scenario determination table shown in FIG. 60 is a table for determining an icon display mode scenario when the look-ahead zone effect or the like is not executed and the handshake event notice is not executed, and is stored in the sub RAM 102c. The pre-judgment result indicated by the starting opening winning designation command that is the target of the main starting opening winning designation command, the number of first starting opening winning designation commands stored in the first effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and , Normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL. It is associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the normal icon display mode scenario determination table, the normal icon display mode derived as the determination result of the normal icon final display mode determination in step S1307-4-13. Scenario judgment TBL. Refer to No.

As shown in FIG. 60, a normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL. Each normal icon display mode scenario determination table associated with No is provided with a normal icon display mode scenario, and each normal icon display mode scenario is provided so as to have a preset selection rate. The icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately associated and stored in. In the present embodiment, the number of icon display mode scenarios provided in each normal icon display mode scenario determination table varies, and in each normal icon display mode scenario judgment table, the changing icon display mode is used. It is assumed that the icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately associated with each normal icon display mode scenario so that the selection rate of each icon display mode scenario provided in the scenario judgment table becomes uniform.

FIG. 60 is an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for normal use. "At the time of winning", "2 before change → 1 before change", "1 before change", "1 before change → the change" and "the change" described in the icon display mode scenario judgment table for normal use are It represents the timing at which the icon display mode changes.

The "successful throwing kiss notice" described in FIG. 60 indicates that the throwing kiss notice described later is performed and the display mode of the hold icon or the changing icon is changed. Further, "throw kiss notice failure 1" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon or the changing icon does not change although the throw kiss notice described later is performed. Further, "Throwing kiss notice failure 2" indicates that the throwing kiss notice, which will be described later, is about to be performed, but the throwing kiss notice is not executed.

Further, in the parentheses following the "successful throwing kiss notice" shown in FIG. 60, the display mode of the hold icon or the changing icon that changes depending on the throwing kiss notice is shown.

For example, in the normal icon display mode scenario "70", the hold icon of the second special mode is displayed at the time of winning, and the special symbol one before the change display of the special symbol two before the change is completed. When the variable display of the above is started, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second special mode 11, and in the variable display of the previous special symbol, the display mode of the hold icon is the second special mode by the throwing kiss notice. This is an effect content in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second special mode 13 when the change is changed to 12 and the change is started after the change display of the previous special symbol is completed.

Further, in the icon display mode scenario "73" for normal use, the hold icon in the normal mode is displayed at the time of winning, and in the change display of the special symbol immediately before the change, the display mode of the hold icon is the first in the throwing kiss notice. 2 An attempt is made to change to the special mode 11, but when the change ends in failure, the normal mode remains, and the change is started after the change display of the previous special symbol is finished, the hold icon is displayed. The display mode is changed to the second special mode 12, and in the change, the display mode of the changing icon is changed to the second special mode 13 by the notice of the throwing kiss.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the normal icon display mode scenario in step S1307-4-15, the sub CPU 102a transfers the normal icon display mode scenario data indicating the normal icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result to the sub RAM 102c. The effect information is stored in the hold storage area. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit in which the start opening winning designation command is stored in step S1307-1.

In this embodiment, the first special mode is set as the display mode of the icon for normal use when neither the look-ahead zone effect nor the handshake event notice is performed. As the first special aspect, one kind of display mode in which the image is circular and the color is white blinking is set, but in addition to this, the color is set as in the second special aspect 11 to the second special aspect 15. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of the first special mode to be changed.

In this case, for example, the display mode in which the figure is circular and the color is blinking is the first special aspect 11, the display mode in which the figure is circular and the color is green is the first special aspect 12, and the display mode in which the figure is circular and the color is red. The first special aspect 13 is a display mode in which the shape is circular and the color is zebra pattern 14, and the display mode in which the shape is circular and the color is rainbow color is the first special mode 15. Then, which first special mode the icon is displayed can be determined based on whether or not the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command related to the changing icon is a big hit.

In this case, the jackpot winning expectation degree according to the first special aspect 11 to the first special aspect 15 is the same as the second special aspect, the first special aspect 11 <the first special aspect 12 <the first special aspect 13 <the first. It is also possible to increase in the order of special aspect 14 <first special aspect 15. Then, when the display mode of the icon is changed from the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15, at the stage where the icon is displayed as a hold icon before it becomes a changing icon (so-called "look-ahead stage") ( When the icon is displayed as a hold icon in the first hold icon display area 141), it is possible to make it easy to change to the first special aspect 11 to the first special aspect 15.

(Production mode setting process of the effect control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

In step S1310-1, the sub CPU 102a selects an effect mode determination table (see FIG. 65) for setting an effect mode related to execution of the variation effect, and in step S1310-2, the gaming state stored in the sub RAM 102c. , Check the number of times remaining in a short time and the number of times remaining with a high probability.

The effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 65 is a table for determining the effect mode, and includes a gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state, non-time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state), time saving remaining number, and high probability. The remaining number of times, the effect mode, and the effect mode flag are associated.

In step 1310-3, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode by collating the game state, the number of time reduction remaining times, and the high probability remaining number with the selected effect mode determination table, and in step S1310-4, the determined effect mode is set. The corresponding effect mode flag (00H to 02H) is set (stored) in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process is terminated.

(Production design stop display pattern determination process on the production control board)
Next, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and is associated with the current effect mode. Select the effect symbol stop display pattern judgment table. This is because the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern representing the combination (arrangement) of the effect symbols on the predetermined effective line in the effect symbol stop display is divided by the effect mode. Is.

In step S1312-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the effect symbol designation command stored in the effect symbol designation command area of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c. This is because each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table divided by the effect mode is further divided by the effect symbol designation command. In step S1312-3, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) associated with the effect symbol designation command analyzed in step S1307-2 is selected. In step S1312-4, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number value indicated by a random number counter related to the random number for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern.

In each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table, one or a plurality of effect symbol stop display patterns are stored in association with the effect symbol stop display pattern determination value, and are stored, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a). , The effect symbol stop display pattern determination value is appropriately assigned to the effect symbol stop display pattern so as to have a preset selection rate.

In step S1312-5, the sub CPU 102a collates the random number for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern acquired in step S1312-4 with the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table selected in step S1312-3, and stops the effect symbol. Determining the display pattern The effect symbol stop display pattern is determined, and the effect symbol stop display pattern is determined.

In step S1312-6, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern determined in step S1312-5 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312-7, the effect symbol is set. The effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the stop display pattern is set in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

The effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the effect symbol stop display based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command is displayed. It is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

In step S1312-8, the sub CPU 102a confirms the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312-9, the variable effect corresponding to the stop display of the effect symbol related to the present effect symbol stop display pattern determination process (from now on). It is confirmed whether or not the zone fanning effect is executed in the variable effect to be performed). When the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone fanning effect is executed, the process shifts to step S1312-10, and when it is determined that the zone fanning effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process.

In step S1312-10, the sub CPU 102a uses the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for the zone fanning effect stored in the sub ROM 102b to determine the effect symbol stop display pattern for the zone fanning effect. conduct. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for the zone fanning effect, the type (type) of the zone fanning effect is associated with the special symbol used in the stop display of the effect symbol. Is stored.

In step S1322-11, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect symbol stop display control command for the zone fanning effect corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern determined in 1312-10 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The effect symbol stop display control command for the zone fanning effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command for the zone fanning effect, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the effect based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command is performed. The stop display of the symbol (special symbol) is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in preference to the stop display of the effect symbol based on the above-mentioned normal effect symbol stop display control command.

Therefore, in the fanning success effect, the special symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped and displayed on the left side area, the center area, and the right side area of the display unit 140. On the other hand, in the fanning failure effect 1, the special symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped and displayed in the left side area and the right side area of the display unit 140, and the central area is normally determined in step S1312-5. The effect symbol will be stopped and displayed. Further, in the fanning failure effect 2, the special symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped and displayed on the left side area of the display unit 140, and the normal effect determined in step S1312-5 is displayed on the center area and the right side area. The design will be stopped and displayed.

(Pre-reading zone effect start determination process on the effect control board)
A look-ahead zone effect start determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

The sub CPU 102a confirms the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c in step S1314-1, and executes the present look-ahead zone effect in step S1314-2. It is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead zone effect in the (current) variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation pattern specification command related to the determination process. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1314-3, and when it is determined that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a ends the main look-ahead zone effect start determination process.

In step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the look-ahead zone effect control command corresponding to the look-ahead zone effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-4, the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect is set to the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer of.

The read-ahead zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the look-ahead zone effect control command, the look-ahead zone effect is executed by the current variation effect, and when the look-ahead zone effect control command is not received, this time. Do not execute the look-ahead zone effect in the variable effect of.

Further, the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of the currently displayed icon to the look-ahead zone effect notification mode if the display mode is not the look-ahead zone effect notification mode. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect, if the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode, the image control board 105 continues the look-ahead zone effect notification mode.

(Variation effect pattern determination process of effect control board)
A variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

In step S1315-1, by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area, the current effect mode and Check the look-ahead zone production scenario.

In step S1315-2, the variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 67 to 72) associated with the current effect mode and the look-ahead zone effect scenario is selected. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table for determining the effect content of the variation effect is set in association with the effect mode (effect modes A to C) and the look-ahead zone effect scenario.

As shown in FIGS. 67 to 72, in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with each effect mode, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the selection rate by the random number for the variation effect pattern determination ( %), The type of the variable effect pattern to be selected, the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern, the time of the variable effect corresponding to the variable effect pattern, and the effect content of the variable effect are associated with each other.

The variable effect pattern is an effect mode of the variable effect, and the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and the effect device 17 are determined by determining the variable effect pattern. The specific effect content (mode) of the variable effect performed by the effect button device 18 will also be determined. For example, the effect content of the variable effect in the image display device 14 includes the mode of variable display of the effect symbol (presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect), the presence / absence of reach effect, the content of reach effect, and the components of the variable effect such as the effect development configuration. Are associated with each other. Details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72.

In step S1315-3, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-4, the random number counter related to the random number for determining the variation effect pattern is set. By acquiring the indicated random number value and collating the determination result of the jackpot determination, the special figure variation pattern specification command, and the random number for determining the variation effect pattern with the variation effect pattern determination table selected in step S1315-2 in step S1315-5. Determine the variable production pattern.

In step S1315-6, the sub CPU 102a sets the variation effect control command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-7, the variation effect time, which is the effect time of the variation effect, is set. It is set in the variation effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-8, the variation effect data corresponding to the variation effect pattern is set in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the variation effect control command, the effect device such as the image display device 14 causes the effect device such as the image display device 14 to execute the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the command.

Further, the fluctuation effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the variation effect, by the variation effect timer counter.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table)
67 to 72 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation effect pattern. 67 to 70 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode A, FIG. 71 is a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode B, and FIG. 72 is a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern determination table.

Of the variation effect pattern determination tables for the effect mode A, FIG. 67 is a table selected when the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect are not executed, and FIG. 68 (a) shows the zone fanning failure effect 1. It is a table selected at the time of execution, FIG. 68 (b) is a table selected at the time of execution of a zone fanning failure effect 2, and FIG. It is a table to be selected, and FIG. 70 is a table selected during execution of the look-ahead zone effect.

Here, each term described in the effect content of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 67 to 72 will be described.

"No pseudo-fanning" means that the pseudo-fanning effect that suggests the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect or whether or not the chance eye is temporarily stopped (expected to generate the pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed. .. "Pseudo-fanning failure" means that the pseudo-fanning effect is executed, but the pseudo-continuous symbol and the chance eye do not temporarily stop. "Successful pseudo-fanning" means that the pseudo-fanning effect is executed and the pseudo-ream pattern and the chance eye are temporarily stopped. The "pseudo-ream" means that the re-variation of the temporarily stopped effect symbol is executed.

The "failure of reach fanning" means that the reach fanning effect is executed depending on whether or not the reach effect is executed, but the reach is not established and the reach effect is not executed. "Successful reach fanning" means that the reach fanning effect is executed, the reach is established, and the reach effect is executed.

The "shortened variation" means that the shortened variation effect is executed in which the effect time (variation time) is shorter than the normal variation (6 seconds or 8 seconds) and reach does not occur. The "ultra-shortened variation" means that the super-shortened variation effect is executed in which the effect time (variation time) is shorter than the shortened variation effect (2 seconds or 4 seconds) and reach does not occur.

"N reach" means that the normal reach effect is executed. "N reach (transition production)" is a transition production (development production) that suggests the development of normal reach production, SP reach production, and SPSP reach production (executed in the process of developing into SP reach production and SPSP reach production). Means that is executed. "N reach (transition / return effect)" means that the normal reach effect and the transition effect are executed, but the return effect does not develop into the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect.

The “SP reach 1” means that the first SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. The “SP reach 2” means that the second SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. The second SP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (the special game is executed) is higher than that of the first SP reach effect.

The “SP reach 3” means that the third SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probability variation game state) is executed. The “SP reach 4” means that the fourth SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probability variation game state) is executed. The 4th SP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (the special game is executed) is higher than that of the 3rd SP reach effect.

The “SP reach 5” means that a dedicated (unique) fifth SP reach effect is executed in the effect mode C (low probability time and short game state). The “SP reach 6” means that a dedicated (unique) sixth SP reach effect is executed in the effect mode C (low probability short game state). The 6th SP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (the special game is executed) is higher than that of the 5th SP reach effect.

The “SPSP reach 1” means that the first SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. The “SPSP reach 2” means that the second SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal gaming state) is executed. The second SPSP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (the special game is executed) is higher than that of the first SPSP reach effect.

The “SPSP reach 3” means that the third SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probability variation game state) is executed. The “SPSP reach 4” means that the fourth SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probability variation game state) is executed. The 4th SPSP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (the special game is executed) is higher than that of the 3rd SPSP reach effect.

The “SPSP reach 5” means that a dedicated (unique) fifth SPSP reach effect is executed in the effect mode C (low probability short game state). The “SPSP reach 6” means that a dedicated (unique) sixth SPSP reach effect is executed in the effect mode C (low probability short game state). The 6th SPSP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (the special game is executed) is higher than that of the 5th SPSP reach effect.

The “ST effect 1” means that the first step effect, which is the first step of the story effect composed of a plurality of steps (steps), is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. “ST effect 2” means that the second step effect, which is the second step of the story effect, is executed. “ST effect 3” means that the third step effect, which is the final step of the story effect, is executed.

In addition, in the story production, it is highly expected that the big hit will be won because the step production progresses to the next and subsequent step productions due to the temporary stop and re-variation (special production) of the production symbols in the pseudo-continuous production. It is a preview effect that suggests (expects the execution of the special game), and suggests that the expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the story effect is not executed (expects the execution of the special game). It is a kind. Further, the degree of expectation of winning the special game when each step effect of the story effect is executed is 1st step effect <2nd step effect <3rd step effect.

The "zone fanning failure 1" means that the zone fanning failure effect 1 that incites whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed is executed. The "zone fanning failure 2" means that the zone fanning failure effect 2 that incites whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed is executed. "Successful zone fanning" means that the zone fanning success effect that notifies (directs) that the look-ahead zone effect is executed is executed.

The “zone effect” means that the first zone effect of the look-ahead zone effect is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The “heat zone effect” means that the second zone effect of the look-ahead zone effect is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

The look-ahead zone effect is a look-ahead notice effect that expects a big hit by executing the zone effect over one or more variable effects (variable display of special symbols), and the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is high. It is a kind of sign production that suggests that it is expensive. Further, the degree of expectation of winning the special game when each look-ahead zone effect is executed is 1 zone effect <2nd zone effect.

In this way, each variation effect pattern determination table is executed by the image display device 14 by setting a dedicated variation effect pattern or setting various effects to be executed at different ratios. The effect mode of the variable effect is different for each effect mode (game state). The type of variable effect pattern executed in the normal game state and the probabilistic game state may be the same, or the type of the variable effect pattern executed in the normal game state and the low probability time-shortening game state may be the same. Alternatively, the type of the variable effect pattern executed in the probable variable gaming state and the low probable time-shortening gaming state may be the same.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72 is that if the variation effect patterns have the same effect time (variation time), they are more simulated than the variation effect patterns in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. One point is that the variable production pattern in which the continuous production is executed has a higher expectation of winning the big hit (the special game is executed). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous production is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72, if the effect time (variation time) is the same variation effect pattern, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed without the story effect. There is a point that the expectation of a big hit (a special game is executed) is higher in the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed with the story effect than in the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous production is accompanied by a story production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72, a specific reach is performed by executing a transition effect after a story effect (corresponding to a sign effect) is executed as a variation effect pattern. The first story pseudo-variable production pattern (corresponding to the first specific production mode) that develops into the production (SP / SPSP reach production), and the transition production is executed after the story production is executed, but the return production is executed. The second story pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the second specific effect mode), in which the transition effect is executed after returning to the story effect and develops into a specific reach effect, is set. By doing so, it is possible to execute a novel variation effect that has never existed in the past, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72, the second story pseudo variation effect pattern is more successful than the first story pseudo variation effect pattern (a special game is executed). There is a high degree of expectation. By doing so, when the story production is executed, the player's expectation as to whether it is the first story pseudo-variable production pattern or the second story pseudo-variable production pattern can be raised, and the interest of the game can be raised. Can be improved.

As the fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72, the story effect of returning after the return effect is executed in the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern is the first before the execution of the transition effect. The point is that it is not the second step effect following the step effect but the third step effect (step skipping is performed with the transition effect in between). By doing so, the difference between the first story pseudo-variable effect pattern and the second story pseudo-variable effect pattern can be clarified, and the player's expectation for the second story pseudo-variable effect pattern can be raised. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned second story pseudo-variation effect pattern, the story effect of returning after the return effect is executed is set as the third step effect, but the second step effect may be used. Further, the pattern in which the second step effect is executed after the return effect is executed is defined as the second story pseudo-variable effect pattern, and the pattern in which the third step effect is executed after the return effect is executed is the third story pseudo-variable effect pattern. The expectation of winning the jackpot (when a special game is executed) when each story pseudo-variation effect pattern is executed is set to the first story pseudo-variation effect pattern <second story pseudo-variation effect pattern <third story pseudo-variation effect effect. It may be a pattern. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the step skipping is performed with the return effect in between, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in each story pseudo-variable effect pattern, the SPSP reach effect may be executed via the SP reach effect after the transition effect, or the SPSP reach effect may be performed after the transition effect without going through the SP reach effect. You may want to do it. Further, although the story effect (predictive effect) is executed in the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, it may be executed in the variable effect pattern not accompanied by the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As the first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, a specific reach effect (SP) is performed by executing a transition effect after a zone effect (corresponding to a sign effect) is executed as a variation effect pattern. / SPSP reach effect) 1st zone pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the 1st specific effect mode), and the transition effect is executed after the zone effect is executed, but the return effect is executed to perform the zone effect. There is a point that a second zone pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the second specific effect mode) is set, in which the transition effect is executed after returning to, and the specific reach effect is developed. By doing so, it is possible to execute a novel variation effect that has never existed in the past, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern wins a big hit (special game is executed) than the above-mentioned first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern. ) There is a high degree of expectation. By doing so, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether the pattern is the first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern or the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern. It is possible to improve the interest.

As the third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, it is expected that the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern will win a big hit (special game will be executed) than the first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern. The point is that the degree is high. By doing so, when the zone effect is executed, the player's expectation as to whether it is the first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern or the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern can be raised, and the interest of the game can be raised. Can be improved.

As the fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the transition effect is executed after the first zone effect is executed, but the return effect is executed to return to the second zone effect. The point is that a third zone pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the third specific effect mode) is set, in which the transition effect is executed after that and the specific reach effect is developed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the zone effect is promoted with the return effect in between, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, it is expected that the third zone pseudo-variation effect pattern will win a big hit (special game will be executed) than the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern. The point is that the degree is high. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to which of the first to third zone pseudo-variable effect patterns is when the zone effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

In each zone pseudo-variable effect pattern, it was assumed that after the transition effect, the SP reach effect was transferred (developed) and then the SPSP reach effect was transferred (developed), but after the transition effect, the SP reach effect was not used. You may shift (develop) to SPSP reach production. Further, although the zone effect (predictive effect) is executed in the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, it may be executed in the variable effect pattern not accompanied by the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Further, although the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect are not executed in the effect mode B (probability variation game state) and the effect mode C (low probability time-shortening game state), they are executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. It may be executed in the effect mode B or the effect mode C.

Further, the execution probabilities of the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be different in each effect mode. The look-ahead zone effect may be executed so that the execution probability is low (effect mode A> effect mode B, effect mode A> effect mode C, effect mode A> effect mode C> effect mode B, etc.), or vice versa. In order to further raise the expectations of the player, the more advantageous the production mode is for the player, the higher the probability of executing the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect (production mode A <production mode B, production mode A <production). Mode C, effect mode A <effect mode C <effect mode B, etc.) may be used.

Further, in each effect mode, only the look-ahead zone effect may be executed without executing the zone precursor effect, or the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be executed in some effect modes, but in other effect modes. Only the look-ahead zone effect may be executed. Even in this case, the execution probabilities of the look-ahead zone effects in each effect mode may be different as described above.

(Operation effect determination process of the effect control board)
Next, the operation effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

In step S1316-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-2, the effect stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The operation effect determination table (see FIG. 73) corresponding to the current effect mode specified by the mode flag is selected. This is because the operation effect pattern for determining the presence / absence of execution of the operation effect and the effect content is set in association with the effect mode (effect modes A to C).

As shown in FIGS. 73A to 73C, the operation effect determination table associated with each effect mode includes a variation effect pattern, a selection rate based on a random number for operation effect pattern determination, and an operation to be selected. The type of effect pattern and the effect content of the operation effect are associated with each other.

The operation effect pattern is an execution mode of the operation effect, and by determining the operation effect pattern, whether or not to execute the operation effect fanning or the operation effect in the variable effect, and at any timing (at any time). It will be decided whether to perform the operation effect fanning or the operation effect. The details of the operation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

In step S1316-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number value indicated by a random number counter related to the random number for determining the operation effect pattern, and in step S1316-4, the variable effect pattern is displayed in the operation effect pattern determination table selected in step S1316-2. The operation effect pattern is determined by collating the random number for determining the operation effect pattern, and the determined operation effect pattern is set in the operation effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1316-5.

The sub CPU 102a determines in step S1316-6 whether or not the determined operation effect pattern is an operation effect pattern for executing the operation effect (including the operation effect fanning), and is an operation effect pattern for executing the operation effect. If it is determined, the process is transferred to step S1316-7, and if it is determined that the pattern is not the operation effect pattern for executing the operation effect, the operation effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1316-7, the sub CPU 102a selects an operation effect scenario determination table (see FIGS. 74 to 76) corresponding to the determined operation effect pattern. This is because the operation effect scenario for determining the operation effect scenario is set in association with the operation effect pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in each operation effect scenario determination table, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the selection rate (%) by the random number for the operation effect scenario determination, the selected operation effect scenario, and the effect contents of the operation effect are displayed. Are associated with each other.

The operation effect scenario is an effect mode of the operation effect, and when the operation effect scenario is determined, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and the operation effect device 17 are used. The specific effect content (mode) of the operation effect fanning and the operation effect performed by the effect button device 18 will also be determined.

For example, in the effect content of the operation effect, the type of operation effect fan that suggests (notices) the possibility that the operation effect may be executed and / or the type of the operation effect to be executed is displayed on the image display device 14. The type of the promotion image for prompting the operation (operation input) of the effect button 18A, the light emitting mode of the effect button 18A while the promotion image is being displayed, and the effect mode of the operation effect executed by the operation of the effect button 18A are associated with each other. ing. The details of the operation effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76.

The sub CPU 102a acquires the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for determining the operation effect scenario in step S1316-8, and determines the jackpot in the operation effect scenario determination table selected in step S1316-7 in step S1316-9. As a result, the operation effect scenario is determined by collating the random number for determining the operation effect scenario, and the determined operation effect scenario is set in the operation effect scenario storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1316-10.

The operation effect pattern set in the operation effect pattern storage area and the operation effect scenario set in the operation effect scenario storage area are referred to in the effect input control process of step S1500, and the operation effect fanning and operation based on the operation effect scenario are referenced. The effect is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 14.

(Operation effect judgment table)
73 (a) to 73 (c) are diagrams showing an operation effect pattern determination table referred to when determining an operation effect pattern. 73 (a) is an operation effect determination table for the effect mode A, FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing an operation effect determination table for the effect mode B, and FIG. 73 (c) is an effect mode. It is a figure which shows the operation effect determination table for C.

In the effect contents of the operation effect determination table shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c), “N reach” means a normal reach effect. “Δ” means that the operation effect fanning of the Gase is executed without the operation effect being executed. “○” means that the operation effect is executed and the operation effect is executed.

The first feature of the operation effect determination table for the effect mode A shown in FIG. 73 (a) is that the higher the expectation of winning a big hit, the lower the rate at which the operation effect fanning of Gase is executed. Be done. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player's expectation of whether or not the jackpot game is executed to be attenuated, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the operation effect determination table for the effect mode A shown in FIG. 73 (a), the operation effect fanning of the Gase is not executed during the second normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect. The points set to are mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by preventing the player from giving a sense of loss after the variable effect has progressed to some extent.

The first feature of the operation effect determination table for the effect mode B shown in FIG. 73 (b) is that the operation effect fanning of the Gase is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to play the game without damaging the player's mood in the production mode B (probability changing game state), which is the most advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

The first feature of the operation effect determination table for the effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c) is that the higher the expectation of winning a big hit, the lower the rate at which the operation effect fanning of Gase is executed. Be done. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player's expectation of whether or not the jackpot game is executed to be attenuated, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the operation effect determination table for the effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c), the operation effect fanning of the Gase is not executed during the second normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect. The points set to are mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by preventing the player from giving a sense of loss after the variable effect has progressed to some extent.

The third feature of the operation effect determination table for the effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c) is that the execution probability of the operation effect fanning of the Gase is lower than that of the operation effect determination table for the effect mode A. By doing so, in the production mode C (low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state), which is more advantageous to the player than the production mode A, it is possible to play the game without damaging the player's mood, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

In addition, in the effect mode A and the effect mode C, the operation effect fanning of the Gase is not executed except during the first normal reach effect, but the timing after that (during the second normal reach effect, during the SP reach effect, During the SPSP reach effect), the operation effect fanning of the Gase may be executed. In that case, the rate at which the operation effect fanning of Gase is executed may be lowered as the fluctuation effect progresses, or the operation effect fanning of Gase may not be executed only during the SPSP reach effect. ..

Further, in the effect mode B, the operation effect fanning of the gasse is not executed, but the operation effect fanning of the gasse may be executed only during the first normal reach effect, or the operation effect fanning of the gasse may be executed at each timing. It may be executed, or the operation effect fanning of Gase may not be executed only during the SPSP reach effect. In that case, it is preferable that the ratio of the operation effect fanning of the Gase at each timing is lower than that of the other effect modes.

In addition, in each effect mode, when the operation effect fanning of Gase is executed at the timing after the first normal reach effect, the operation effect fanning of Gase is performed during the second normal reach effect than during the first normal reach effect. The rate of execution may be higher, or the rate of execution of the operation effect of Gase may be higher during the first normal reach effect than during the SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect. May be good.

(Operation production scenario judgment table)
74 to 76 are operation effect scenario determination tables referred to when determining an operation effect scenario. FIG. 74 is an operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern A8 determined in the effect mode A, and FIG. 75 is an operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern B4 determined in the effect mode B. FIG. Reference numeral 76 denotes an operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern C4 determined in the effect mode C.

In the effect content of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item of "operation effect fan" indicates (notice) that the operation effect may be executed and / or the type of the operation effect to be executed. The type is specified.

In the item of "Operation effect fanning", "Gase fanning effect" is the operation effect fanning of Gase selected when the operation effect is not executed, and "Faning effect A" and "Faning effect B" are executed by the operation effect. It is an operation effect fan that is selected when it is done. Specific examples of each fanning effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 83 to 84.

In the effect content of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item of "promotion image" defines the type of promotion image (see FIG. 77) displayed on the image display device 14 in order to prompt the operation (operation input) of the effect button 18A. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 77, the "promoted image 1A" in the "promoted image" item imitates (shows) the base image AG of the first form (shape) having a predetermined decorativeness and the effect button 18A in the normal state. ) It is composed of a button image BG and a gauge image CG showing the remaining time of the valid period. The promotion image 1A is composed of two types of display modes. When the color of the button image BG is white, it becomes the promotion image 1A-1, and when the color of the button image BG is yellow, it becomes the promotion image 1A-2.

As shown in FIG. 77, the "promoted image 1B" is composed of a base image AG of the first form (shape), a button image BG imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in a protruding state, and a gauge image. There is. The promotion image 1B is composed of two types of display modes. When the color of the button image BG is white, it becomes the promotion image 1B-1, and when the color of the button image is yellow, it becomes the promotion image 1B-2.

As shown in FIG. 77, the "promoted image 2A" is a base image AG of the second form (shape) having a higher decorativeness than the first form, and a button image BG imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in a normal state. And a gauge image. The promotion image 2A consists of three display modes. If the color of the button image BG is blue, it becomes the promotion image 2A-1, if the color of the button image is green, it becomes the promotion image 2A-2, and the color of the button image is red. Then, it becomes the promotion image 2A-3.

As shown in FIG. 77, the "promoted image 2B" is composed of a base image AG of the second form (shape), a button image BG imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in a protruding state, and a gauge image. There is. The promotion image 2B consists of three display modes. If the color of the button image BG is blue, it becomes the promotion image 2B-1, if the color of the button image is green, it becomes the promotion image 2B-2, and the color of the button image is red. Then, it becomes the promotion image 2B-3.

As shown in FIG. 77, the "promoted image 3A" is a base image AG of a third form (shape) having a higher decorativeness than the second form, and a button image BG imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in a normal state. And a gauge image. The promotion image 3A consists of three types of display modes. If the color of the button image BG is blue, it becomes the promotion image 3A-1, if the color of the button image is green, it becomes the promotion image 3A-2, and the color of the button image is red. Then, it becomes the promotion image 3A-3.

As shown in FIG. 77, the "promoted image 3B" is composed of a base image AG of a third form (shape), a button image BG imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in a protruding state, and a gauge image. There is. The promotion image 3B consists of three types of display modes. If the color of the button image BG is blue, it becomes the promotion image 3B-1, if the color of the button image is green, it becomes the promotion image 3B-2, and the color of the button image is red. Then, it becomes the promotion image 3B-3.

The degree of expectation of the jackpot winning (special game is executed) corresponding to the type of the promotion image is the promotion image 1A <promotion image 1B (specifically, promotion image 1A-1 <promotion image 1A-2, promotion image 1B-1). <Promotion image 1B-2), promotion image 2 <promotion image 3, promotion image 2A <promotion image 2B (specifically, promotion image 2A-1 <promotion image 2A-2 <promotion image 2A-3, promotion image 2B) -1 <promotion image 2B-2, promotion image 2B-3,), and promotion image 3A <promotion image 3B (specifically, promotion image 3A-1 <promotion image 3A-2 <promotion image 3A-3, promotion image). 3B-1 <promoted image 3B-2 <promoted image 3B-3). That is, the expectation of the jackpot winning (the special game is executed) corresponding to the color of the button image BG of the promotion image is white <yellow, blue <green <red.

In the effect content of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item of the effect button 18A defines the operation state and the light emitting mode of the effect button 18A during the effective period in which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid.

"Normal" in the item of "effect button" means that the effect button 18A is arranged in the normal position (normal state), and "protrusion" means that the effect button 18A is arranged in the protrusion position (projection state). Means that. Further, "◯ light emission" means a light emission mode of the effect button 18A.

The expectation level of the jackpot winning (the special game is executed) corresponding to the arrangement (state) of the effect button 18A is the normal state (normal position) <protruding position (protruding state). In addition, the expectation of the jackpot winning (special game is executed) corresponding to the light emission mode of the effect button 18A is white light emission <yellow light emission <yellow flashing, blue light emission <green light emission <red light emission <red flashing. ing.

In the effect content of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item of "operation effect" defines the type of operation effect to be executed when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period.

"Hanabuki snow 1" in the item of "operation effect" means that an operation effect image in which a small amount of petals are scattered is displayed on the image display device 14, and "flower blizzard 2" is in the image display device 14. It means that the operation effect image in which a large amount of petals are scattered is displayed, and "flower blizzard 3" means that the operation effect image in which a large amount of petals are scattered is displayed on the image display device 14. The expectation level of the jackpot winning (special game is executed) corresponding to each flower blizzard is flower blizzard 1 <flower blizzard 2 <flower blizzard 3.

"Green cut-in 1" means that the background and / or the edge is green and the cut-in image by the character 1 is displayed on the image display device 14, and "green cut-in 2" means that the background is displayed on the image display device 14. And / or that the edge is green and the cut-in image by the character 2 is displayed, and "red cut-in 2" means that the background and / or the edge is red and the cut-in image by the character 2 is displayed. Meaning, "rainbow cut-in 2" means that the cut-in image by the character 2 is displayed with a rainbow-colored background and / or edge.

The expectation of the jackpot winning (special game is executed) corresponding to each cut-in image is green cut-in 1 <green cut-in 2 <red cut-in 2 <rainbow cut-in 2 (big hit confirmed). The rainbow cut-in 2 may be used as an effect to confirm that the special game most advantageous to the player is executed.

The first feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76 is the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the effect mode A, and the promotion image selected / determined in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. There is a difference from the type. By doing so, the promotion image displayed on the image display device 14 can be changed according to the change in the game state (effect mode), and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the player's boredom and make it easier for the player to recognize (understand) the change in the game state.

The type of the promotion image selected / determined in all the effect modes may be different, or the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode B may be the same and selected in the effect mode C. -The type of the promotion image may be different from the type of the promotion image to be determined, or the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode C may be the same, and the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the effect mode B may be the same. It may be different from the type of.

Further, the types of the promotion images selected / determined in the effect mode A may be larger than the types of the promotion images selected / determined in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. By doing so, the types of the promotion images displayed on the image display device 14 in the effect mode A, which has a longer stay period than the effect mode B and the effect mode C, are increased, and the player's boredom can be suppressed. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the types of the promotion images selected / determined in the effect mode B may be larger than the types of the promotion images selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode C, or may be selected / determined in the effect mode C. The types of facilitating images may be larger than the types of facilitating images selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

As the second feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the promotion image selected and determined in the effect mode B (high probability gaming state) and the effect mode C (low probability time and short game state) is better. The decorativeness (appeal to the player) is higher than the promotion image selected / determined in the production mode A (normal gaming state), in other words, the promotion image selected / determined in the production mode A is simpler. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player to win the big hit in the game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The decorativeness (appeal to the player) of the promoted image selected / determined in all the effect modes may be different, and the decorativeness of the promoted image selected / determined in the effect mode B and the effect mode C may be different. The decorativeness of the promoted image selected / determined in the effect mode A may be enhanced, and the decorativeness of the promoted image selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode C may be enhanced in the effect mode B. The decorativeness of the promoted image selected / determined may be enhanced, or the promoted image selected / determined in the effect mode C may be enhanced rather than the decorativeness of the promoted image selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode B. The decorativeness of the image may be enhanced.

As the third feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, there are a plurality of types of promotion images selected / determined in the effect mode B and the effect mode C (promotion image 2A, promotion image 2B, promotion image 3A, There is a promotion image 3B), and the expectation of the jackpot winning (special game is executed) corresponding to each promotion image is different, and the appearance rate of each promotion image is the production mode B (high probability game state) and the production mode C. There are different points in (low probability short game state). By doing so, it is possible to change the promotion image that is easily displayed on the image display device 14 according to the change in the game state (effect mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The appearance rate of the promotion image 2 is the effect mode B <effect mode C, and the promotion image 3 is the effect mode B> effect mode C, but the appearance rate of the promotion image 2 is the effect mode B> effect. The mode C may be set, and the appearance rate of the promotion image 3 may be set to the effect mode B <effect mode C. Further, the appearance rate of the promotion image 2A, the promotion image 2B, the promotion image 3A, and the promotion image 3B in the effect mode B and the appearance rate in the effect mode C may be set individually.

As the fourth feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the light emission mode (emission color, lighting mode) of the effect button 18A selected and determined in the effect mode A and the effect buttons of the effect modes B and C. The point that it differs from the light emission mode selected / determined in 18A can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the effect button 18A according to the change in the game state (effect mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to suppress the player's boredom and make it easier for the player to recognize (understand) the change in the game state.

The light emitting mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in all the effect modes may be different, or the light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode B may be the same. The light emitting mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in the mode C may be different from that of the effect button 18A selected / determined in the effect mode C, or the light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode C may be the same. It may be different from the light emitting mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in.

As the fifth feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the display color of the button image BG of the promotion image to be selected / determined and the effect to be selected / determined are selected and determined in any effect mode. The point that the emission color of the button 18A is the same is mentioned. By doing so, there is no contradiction between the display color of the button image BG displayed on the image display device 14 and the emission color of the effect button 18A, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

In addition, there is a contradiction between the display color of the button image BG of the promotion image selected / determined and the emission color of the effect button 18A selected / determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%) when the jackpot is won. May be set so that By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot has been won even before the effect button 18A is operated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the operation effect scenario determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the form (usually, protrusion) of the button image BG of the promotion image to be selected / determined and the selection / selection are performed regardless of the effect mode. The point is that the form (usually, protrusion) of the effect button 18A to be determined is the same. By doing so, there is no obvious contradiction between the form of the button image BG displayed on the image display device 14 and the form of the effect button 18A, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

It should be noted that there is a clear contradiction between the form of the button image BG of the promotion image selected / determined and the form of the effect button 18A selected / determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%) when the jackpot is won. May be set so that By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot has been won even before the effect button 18A is operated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the types of promoted images selected / determined in each effect mode are different, but the types of promoted images selected / determined in each effect mode are displayed on the image display device 14 as the same type. Only the display size of the promotion image may be different. For example, in the effect mode A, the promotion image is displayed in the first display size, in the effect mode B, the promotion image is displayed in the second display size, and in the effect mode B, the promotion image is displayed in the third display size. Is.

In this case, which of the first display size to the third display size should be the largest display size may be arbitrarily set, but the first display size <third display size <second display size, etc. By setting the display size of the promotion image to be larger as the production mode becomes more advantageous to the player, it becomes easier to raise the player's expectation for the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, in any two of the effect modes A to C, the promotion image may be displayed in the first display size, and in the remaining one effect mode, the promotion image may be displayed in the second display size. .. Further, a plurality of display sizes of the promotion image in each effect mode may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the form of the effect button 18A in each effect mode A to C is the same, but the form (protruding state) of the effect button 18A in each effect mode A to C is set to be different. In each of the effect modes A to C, the promotion image corresponding to the form of the effect button 18A may be displayed. For example, in the effect mode A, the effect button 18A is set to the normal state and a promotion image imitating the effect button 18A in the normal state is displayed. The promotion image imitating 18A is displayed, and in the effect mode C, the effect button 18A is set as the second protruding state, and the promotion image imitating the effect button 18A in the second protruding state is displayed.

In this case, which of the first protruding state and the second protruding state has the larger protruding amount of the effect button 18A may be arbitrarily set, but the effect is advantageous to the player, such as the first protruding state> the second protruding state. If the amount of protrusion of the effect button 18A is set to increase as the mode is set, it becomes easy to raise the player's expectation for the big hit, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in any two of the effect modes A to C, the effect button 18A is set as the normal state, and a promotion image imitating the effect button 18A in the normal state is displayed, and in the remaining one effect mode, the effect button 18A protrudes. As a state, a promotion image imitating the effect button 18A in the protruding state may be displayed. Further, the difference in the arrangement of the effect buttons 18A in the effect modes A to C may be limited only during the valid period.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is no one effect button to be operated during the valid period, but a plurality of effect buttons having different shapes are provided, and the types of effect buttons to be operated in the effect modes A to C are different. In each of the effect modes A to C, a promotion image imitating the effect button to be operated may be displayed. For example, in the effect mode A, the operation target is set as the first effect button and a promotion image imitating the first effect button is displayed, and in the effect mode B, the operation target is set as the second effect button and the promotion image imitating the second effect button is displayed. Is displayed, and in the effect mode C, the operation target is set as the third effect button, and a promotion image imitating the third effect button is displayed.

Further, in any two of the effect modes A to C, the operation target is set as the first effect button and a promotion image imitating the first effect button is displayed, and in the remaining one effect mode, the operation target is set as the second effect. As a button, a promotion image imitating the second effect button may be displayed. Further, a number of effect buttons larger than the number of effect modes may be provided, and a plurality of effect buttons to be operated may be set in each effect mode. Further, the operation target is not limited to the effect button, as long as it can accept input from the player, it may be something like a touch panel, or a motion such as an infrared sensor without an operation unit. It may be a sensor.

(Icon change notice judgment processing of the production control board)
Next, the icon change notice determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 45.

In step S1317-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1317-2, the special figure change related to the icon change notice determination process. It is determined whether or not to execute the throwing kiss notice in the (this time) variable effect corresponding to the pattern specification command.

When the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1317-3, and when it determines that the throwing kiss notice is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1317-4.

In step S1317-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a throwing kiss notice effect control command indicating the effect content corresponding to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1317-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines the icon change notice. End the process. Here, in the "effect content according to the icon display mode scenario", the icon related to the throwing kiss notice hits the thrown heart when the character throws the kiss or leaves, and the thrown heart hits the throwing kiss (notice of the notice). The target icon), whether or not to change the display mode of the icon, and the display mode after the change when the icon is changed are included.

The throwing kiss notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the throwing kiss notice effect control command, the image control board 105 causes the throwing kiss notice to be executed according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received throwing kiss notice effect control command. Details of the throwing kiss notice will be described later.

In step S1317-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the handshake event notice in the (current) fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command related to the icon change determination process, and gives the handshake event notice. If it is determined to be executed, the process is transferred to step S1317-5, and if it is determined not to execute the handshake event notice, the icon change notice determination process is terminated.

In step S1317-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a handshake event notice effect control command indicating the effect content corresponding to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1317-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines the icon change notice. End the process. Here, the "effect content according to the icon display mode scenario" includes the number of dialogues in the handshake event notice and the change pattern of the display mode of the changing icon.

The handshake event notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the handshake event notice effect control command, the image control board 105 causes the handshake event notice to be executed according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received handshake event notice effect control command. Details of the handshake event notice will be described later.

(Pre-reading zone effect end processing of the effect control board)
Next, the look-ahead zone effect end process will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1320-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A is currently set, that is, whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area, and in the effect mode A. If it is determined that there is, the process is transferred to step S1320-2, and if it is determined that the mode is not A, the pre-reading zone effect end process is terminated.

In step S1320-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and the look-ahead zone effect ends in this variable effect. It is determined whether or not, and if it is determined that the look-ahead zone effect is completed, the process is transferred to step S1320-3, and if it is determined that the look-ahead zone effect is not completed, the process is transferred to step S1320-5.

In step S1320-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a look-ahead zone effect end control command for ending the look-ahead zone effect and returning to the background image or the like for the effect mode A in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The read-ahead zone effect end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the look-ahead zone effect end control command, the look-ahead zone effect is terminated, and the mode of the lighting effect of the background image, the BGM, and the effect lighting device 16 is set for the effect mode A. Return to the one.

In step S1320-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the display mode of all the icons displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode to the normal mode by executing the look-ahead zone effect (hereinafter, “first”. (Reset icon effect control command) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

As a result, the icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and all the icons of the look-ahead zone effect notification mode displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are changed to the normal mode. Processing for changing (returning) is performed.

In step S1320-5, the sub CPU 102a confirms the zone precursor effect scenario indicated by the zone precursor effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and the gasse zone precursor effect ends in this variable effect. It is determined whether or not, and if it is determined that the Gase zone precursor effect is completed, the process is transferred to step S1320-6, and if it is determined that the Gase zone precursor effect is not completed, the pre-reading zone effect end process is terminated.

In step S1320-6, the sub CPU 102a sets the display mode of all the icons displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode to the normal mode by executing the gasse zone precursor effect (hereinafter, “second”. (Reset icon effect control command) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

As a result, the second reset icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and all the icons of the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are displayed. A process for changing (returning) to a normal mode is performed.

(Production input control processing of the production control board)
Next, the effect input control process will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

In step S1500-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the variation effect is currently being executed, and if it is determined that the variation effect is being executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1500-2 and is executing the variation effect. If it is determined that this is not the case, the effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1500-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms the operation effect pattern set in the operation effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1500-3, determines whether or not the operation effect is an execution pattern. If it is determined that the pattern is the execution pattern of the operation effect, the process is transferred to step S1500-4, and if it is determined that the pattern is not the execution pattern of the operation effect, the present effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1500-4, the sub CPU 102a confirms the operation effect scenario set in the operation effect scenario storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect state of the current variable effect, and in step S1500-5, the operation effect fanning condition is set. It is determined whether or not it is satisfied, and if it is determined that the operation effect fanning condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S1500-6, and if it is determined that the operation effect fanning condition is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S1500-7.

Specifically, when the current effect state of the variable effect is the timing to generate the operation effect fan specified by the operation effect scenario, it is determined that the operation effect fanning condition is satisfied, and the current variable effect effect state is determined. Is not the timing to generate the operation effect fanning specified by the operation effect fanning, it is determined that the operation effect fanning condition is not satisfied.

In step S1500-6, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effect fanning designation command corresponding to the type of the operation effect fanning specified by the operation effect fanning in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the present effect input control process. As a result, the operation effect fanning designation command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 transmits the fanning image (moving image) of the type corresponding to the operation effect fanning designation command to the image display device 14. Processing for displaying is performed.

In step S1500-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the valid period generation condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the valid period generation condition is satisfied, the process shifts to step S1500-8, and the valid period generation condition is changed. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S1500-10.

Specifically, it is determined that the valid period generation condition is satisfied when the current variable effect effect state is the timing to generate the effective period specified by the operation effect scenario (after the operation effect fanning is executed). If the effect state of the current variable effect is not the timing to generate the effective period specified by the operation effect scenario (after the execution of the operation effect fan), it is determined that the effect period generation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1500-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the valid period flag and the valid time in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1500-9, the operation promotion corresponding to the type of the operation promotion effect specified by the operation effect scenario. The designated command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the effect input control process is terminated.

As a result, the operation promotion designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 causes the effect button 18A to emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation promotion designation command. , Processing for changing the effect button 18A to the protruding state, and processing for displaying the promotion image (moving image) of the type corresponding to the operation promotion designation command on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. Will be performed, and the operation promotion effect will be executed.

In step S1500-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the valid period flag is set in the sub RAM 102c (whether or not it is in the valid period), and if it is determined that the valid period flag is set, the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1500. The process is transferred to -11, and when it is determined that the validity period flag is not set, the present effect input control process is terminated.

The sub CPU 102a determines in step S1500-11 whether or not the effect button 18A has been operated, and if it determines that the effect button 18A has been operated, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1500-12 and states that the effect button 18A has not been operated. If it is determined, the process is transferred to step S1500-13.

In step S1500-12, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation effect designation command corresponding to the type of operation effect specified by the operation effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1500-14.

As a result, the operation effect designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105, and the lamp control board 104 performs a process for driving the effect lighting device 16 and the effect accessory device 17, and also performs an image. The control board 105 performs a process for displaying the operation effect image (moving image) corresponding to the operation effect command on the image display device 14, and the operation effect is executed.

In step S1500-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the valid time has elapsed, shifts the process to step S1500-14 when it determines that the valid time has elapsed, and determines that the valid time has not elapsed. The effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1500-14, the sub CPU 102a clears the validity period flag set in the sub RAM 102c, sets the operation promotion end designation command indicating the end of the operation promotion effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and controls the present effect input. End the process.

As a result, the operation promotion end designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105, and the lamp control board 104 ends the light emission of the effect button 18A or returns the effect button 18A to the normal state. At the same time as the processing is performed, the image control board 105 performs a process for ending the display of the promotion image (moving image), and the execution of the operation promotion effect is completed.

The operation promotion command may be transmitted at a time before a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the occurrence timing of the valid period. By doing so, since the operation promotion image is displayed before the valid period occurs, it is possible to eliminate the wasteful period in which the effect button 18A cannot be operated at the beginning of the valid period.

Further, the operation promotion end command may be transmitted at a time before a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the end timing of the valid period. By doing so, since the display of the promotion image ends before the end of the valid period, it is possible to eliminate the unnecessary operation of the effect button 18A in the final part of the operation promotion effect, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Game information display control processing)
Next, the game information display control process will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

In step S1600-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the jackpot game has started, and if it determines that the jackpot game has started, the process shifts to step S1600-2, and if it determines that the jackpot game has not started, the step The process is transferred to S1600-4.

In step S1600-2, the sub CPU 102a sets a right-handed display command for a jackpot in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the right-handed display command for jackpot is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 launches the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 2A to the image display device 14. Processing is performed to display the right-handed information (right-handed image) that prompts the user in a display mode for a big hit.

As the display mode of the right-handed information (right-handed image), in addition to the above-mentioned display mode for big hits (size: large, decorativeness: high), a display for high accuracy in a high-probability gaming state, which will be described later. There are modes (size: large, decorativeness: medium) and display modes (size: medium, decorativeness: low) for shortening the time during a low-probability time-saving gaming state. The appealing power (appeal power) of the right-handed information (right-handed display image) to the player is a display mode for shortening the time <display mode for high accuracy <display mode for jackpot.

In step S1600-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the number display end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the number display end command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the jackpot number of consecutive villas information (image of the number of consecutive villas) displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. Processing is performed to end the display of the high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image) and the time saving remaining number information (time saving remaining number image).

The sub CPU 102a determines in step S1600-4 whether or not the high-probability gaming state has started, and if it determines that the high-probability gaming state has started, the process shifts to step S1600-5, and the high-probability gaming state is started. If it is determined that it is not, the process is transferred to step S1600-8.

In step S1600-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a right-handed display command for high accuracy in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a right-handed display command for high accuracy is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 launches a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 2A on the image display device 14. Processing is performed to display the right-handed information (right-handed image) prompting the user to do so in a high-accuracy display mode.

In step S1600-6, the sub CPU 102a sets the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c with a command for displaying the number of consecutive villas for high accuracy corresponding to the current number of consecutive villas. As a result, the command for displaying the number of consecutive villas for high accuracy is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 informs the image display device 14 of the number of consecutive villas (image of the number of consecutive villas). Is processed to be displayed in a highly accurate display mode.

In addition to the above-mentioned display mode for high accuracy (size: medium, number display: white lighting), the display mode of the number of consecutive villas information (image of the number of consecutive villas) is in the low accuracy time-shortening gaming state described later. There is a display mode for shortening the time (size: medium, number of times display: blinking white). The appealing power (appeal power) of each display mode of the number of consecutive villas information (image of the number of consecutive villas) is a display mode for high accuracy <a display mode for shortening the time.

In step S1600-7, the sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining number display command 1 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high-probability remaining number display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 provides the image display device 14 with high-probability remaining number information (high-probability remaining number image). A process for displaying in the first display mode for confirmation is performed.

As the display mode of the high-probability remaining number information (high-probability remaining number image), in addition to the above-mentioned first display mode for high accuracy (size: medium, number display: blue lighting), high-probability use described later. There is a second display mode (size: medium, number of times display: lit in yellow) and a third display mode for high probability (size: large, number of times display: lit in red). The appealing power (appeal power) of each display mode of the high-probability remaining number information (high-probability remaining number image) to the player is the first display mode <second display mode <third display mode.

In step S1600-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state, and if it is determined that the current gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state, the process shifts to step S1600-9, and the high probability If it is determined that the game is not in the game state, the process is transferred to step S1600-15.

In step S1600-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not there has been a high probability remaining number of updates, shifts the process to step S1600-10 if it determines that there has been an update, and determines that there has been no update, the game information display control. End the process.

In step S1600-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of remaining high probabilities is greater than "30", and if it is determined that the number of remaining high probabilities is greater than "30", the process is transferred to step S1600-11, and the process is transferred from "30". If it is determined that there are not many, the process is transferred to step S1600-12.

In step S1600-11, the sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining number display command 1 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high-probability remaining number display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 provides the image display device 14 with high-probability remaining number information (high-probability remaining number image). A process for displaying in the first display mode for confirmation is performed.

In step S1600-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of remaining high probabilities is more than "10", and if it is determined that the number of remaining high probabilities is more than "10", the process is transferred to step S1600-13, and the process is started from "10". If it is determined that there are not many, the process is transferred to step S1600-12.

In step S1600-13, the sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining number display command 2 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high-probability remaining number display command 2 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 provides the image display device 14 with high-probability remaining number information (high-probability remaining number image). A process for displaying in the second display mode for confirmation is performed.

In step S1600-14, the sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining number display command 3 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high-probability remaining number display command 3 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 provides the image display device 14 with high-probability remaining number information (high-probability remaining number image). A process for displaying in the third display mode for confirmation is performed.

The sub CPU 102a determines in step S1600-15 whether or not the low-probability short-time gaming state has started, and if it determines that the low-probability short-time gaming state has started, the process shifts to step S1600-16, and the low-probability short-time gaming state If it is determined that is not started, the process is transferred to step S1600-19.

In step S1600-16, the sub CPU 102a sets a right-handed display command for shortening the time in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a right-handed display command for shortening the time is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 launches the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 2A on the image display device 14. Processing is performed to display the right-handed information (right-handed image) prompting the user in a display mode for shortening the working hours.

In step S1600-17, the sub CPU 102a sets the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c with a command for displaying the number of consecutive villas for shortening the time corresponding to the current number of consecutive villas. As a result, the command for displaying the number of consecutive villas for shortening the time is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 provides the image display device 14 with information on the number of consecutive villas (image of the number of consecutive villas). Processing for displaying in the display mode for shortening the time is performed.

In step S1600-18, the sub CPU 102a sets the time saving remaining number display command 1 corresponding to the current time saving remaining number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the time saving remaining number display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the time saving remaining number information (time saving remaining number image) is transmitted to the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. 1 Processing for displaying in the display mode is performed.

As the display mode of the time reduction remaining number information (time reduction remaining number image), in addition to the above-mentioned first display mode for time reduction (size: large, number display: white lighting), a second display for time reduction, which will be described later. There is an aspect (size: medium, number of times display: blinking white). The appealing power (appeal power) to the player in each display mode of the time saving remaining number information (time saving remaining number image) is 1st display mode> 2nd display mode.

In step S1600-19, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and if it is determined that the current gaming state is in the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the process shifts to step S1600-20. If it is determined that the player is not in the low-probability short-time gaming state, the process is transferred to step S1600-24.

In step S1600-20, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not there has been an update for the number of remaining time reductions, shifts the process to step S1600-21 if it determines that there has been an update, and determines that there has been no update, the game information display control process. To finish.

In step S1600-21, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of remaining high probabilities is greater than "20", and if it is determined that the number of remaining high probabilities is greater than "20", the process is transferred to step S1600-22, and the process is transferred from "20". If it is determined that there are not many, the process is transferred to step S1600-23.

In step S1600-22, the sub CPU 102a sets the time saving remaining number display command 1 corresponding to the current time saving remaining number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the time saving remaining number display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the time saving remaining number information (time saving remaining number image) is transmitted to the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. 1 Processing for displaying in the display mode is performed.

In step S1600-23, the sub CPU 102a sets the time saving remaining number display command 2 corresponding to the current time saving remaining number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the time saving remaining number display command 2 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 displays the time saving remaining number information (time saving remaining number image) on the image display device 14 in the second display mode. Processing is performed to display with.

In step S1600-24, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the low-probability short-time gaming state has ended, and if it determines that the low-probability short-time gaming state has ended, the process shifts to step S1600-25, and the low-probability short-time gaming state If it is determined that the game information display control process is not completed, the game information display control process is terminated.

In step S1600-25, the sub CPU 102a sets a normal left-handed display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a normal left-handed display command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 launches the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 2A to the image display device 14. Processing is performed to display the left-handed information (left-handed image) that prompts the user in a normal display mode (size: medium, decorativeness: low).

The left-handed information (left-handed image) displayed on the image display device 14 is executed three times for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds from the start of display or three times less than the upper limit of the second special figure hold number). To end the display of left-handed information (left-handed display image) by the image control board 105 after being displayed over 5 times of execution of fluctuation effect, which is larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved 2nd special figures. Processing is done.

In step S1600-26, the sub CPU 102a sets the number display end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the number display end command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the jackpot number of consecutive villas information (number of consecutive villas image) displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 and the number of consecutive villas image. Processing is performed to end the display of the time saving remaining number information (time saving remaining number image).

As described above, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the type of game information to be displayed on the image display device 14 is different for each game state. Specifically, right-handed information is displayed during the jackpot game, right-handed information, consecutive villa count information, and high-probability remaining number of times information are displayed during the high-probability game state, and right-handed information is displayed during the low-probability short-time game state. , The information on the number of consecutive villas and the information on the number of remaining time reductions are displayed, and the left-handed information is displayed during the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with appropriate game information according to the game state (game progress), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the right-handed information and the number of consecutive villas information to be displayed on the image display device 14 is different for each game state. ing. Specifically, as for the display mode of right-handed information, the appealing power (appeal power, conspicuousness) to the player is higher in the order of low probability time-short game state <high probability game state <big hit game. As for the display mode of the number of consecutive villas, the appealing power to the player is higher in the order of the low-probability short-time gaming state <the high-probability gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player's boredom and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the display mode of right-handed information (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) is displayed in the order of big hit game <high probability game state <low probability short time game state. ) May be higher, or in any other order. Further, the display mode of the right-handed information in any two of the jackpot game, the high-probability game state, and the low-probability short-time game state is the same, and the display mode of the right-handed information in the remaining one game state. It may be different from.

In addition, the information on the number of consecutive villas may be displayed during the jackpot game, and the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the information on the number of consecutive villas may be displayed in the low-probability short-time gaming state <high-probability gaming state. The appealing power to the player may be increased in the order of medium <big hit game state, or other order may be used. In addition, the display mode of the number of consecutive villas in one of the two states of the jackpot game, the high-probability gaming state, and the low-probability short-time gaming state is the same, and the display mode of the number of consecutive villas in the remaining one state. It may be different from.

Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, a display mode of advantageous period information indicating a period in which a state advantageous to the player continues, such as high-probability remaining number information and time-saving remaining number information to be displayed on the image display device 14. At least one of size, decorativeness, and color) is different between the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state. Specifically, the appealing power (appeal power, conspicuousness) to the player is increased in the order of low probability time short game state <high probability game state. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize (understand) that the degree of advantage to the player is different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the advantageous period information is set so that the appealing power (appeal power, conspicuousness) to the player increases in the order of high probability gaming state <low probability short-time gaming state. You may do it. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player's boredom and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, a display mode of advantageous period information indicating a period in which a state advantageous to the player continues, such as high-probability remaining number information and time-saving remaining number information to be displayed on the image display device 14. At least one of size, decorativeness, and color) is changed according to the number of executions of the variable effect (variable display) during the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player's boredom and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the high-probability remaining number of times information is displayed until the high-probability gaming state ends. It is changed multiple times so that the appealing power (appeal power, conspicuousness) to the player increases each time it changes. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to recognize (understand) that the high-probability gaming state is approaching the end, and it is possible to effectively arouse the player's feeling of impatience, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, when the display mode of the high-probability remaining number information is changed over a plurality of times, the display mode of the high-probability remaining number information is changed so that the appealing power to the player becomes a mountain shape, or the appealing power to the player is increased. The display mode of the high-probability remaining number information may be changed so as to have a valley shape, or the display mode of the high-probability remaining number information may be changed so that the appealing power to the player becomes a wave shape. By doing so, it becomes easy to raise and lower the emotions (expectation, impatience, etc.) of the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the time-saving remaining number of times information is displayed in the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state until the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state ends. It is changed multiple times, and each time it is changed, the appealing power (appeal power, conspicuousness) to the player is changed. By doing so, it is possible to gradually calm the expectation of the player, and it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player with the end of the low-probability short-time gaming state.

In addition, when the display mode of the time reduction remaining number information is changed multiple times, the display mode of the time reduction remaining number information is changed so that the appealing power to the player becomes a mountain shape, or the appealing power to the player is a valley type. The display mode of the time reduction remaining number information may be changed so that the display mode of the time reduction remaining number information may be changed, or the display mode of the time reduction remaining number information may be changed so that the appealing power to the player becomes wavy. By doing so, it becomes easy to raise and lower the emotions (expectation, impatience, etc.) of the player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the number of changes and the low probability of the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the high-probability remaining number of times information (advantageous period information) during the high-probability gaming state. The number of changes in the display mode of the time reduction remaining number information (advantageous period information) during the time reduction game state is set to be different. Specifically, the number of changes in the high-probability gaming state is 3 times, and the number of changes in the low-probability short-time gaming state is 2 times. By doing so, it is possible to make the change mode of the player's emotions (expectation, impatience, etc.) different between the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state, and it is recognized that the gaming state is different. It is easy to make it easy to play, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the number of changes in the display mode of the time-saving remaining number information (advantageous period information) in the low-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the number of changes in the display mode of the high-probability remaining number information (advantageous period information) in the high-probability gaming state. You may try to have more. In addition, one of the display mode of the high-probability remaining number of times information (advantageous period information) in the high-probability gaming state and the display mode of the time-saving remaining number of times information in the low-probability time-shortening gaming state is not changed, and the other is once or It may be changed a plurality of times. Further, the display mode of the advantageous period information may be changed when the change lottery is won, or changed when the change lottery is won when the remaining number of times of the advantageous period information reaches a predetermined number. You may.

Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the display mode (size, decorativeness, color) of the launch operation information indicating the mode of the launch operation of the game ball such as the right-handed information and the left-handed information displayed on the image display device 14. At least one of) is different in each game state. Specifically, the appealing power (appeal power, conspicuousness) to the player is increased in the order of normal game state <low probability time short game state <high probability time short game state <big hit game. By doing so, it is possible to incite the player's uplifting feeling during the jackpot game, and to make it difficult for the player to feel dissatisfaction during the normal game state.

It should be noted that the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the launch operation information is displayed in the order of normal game state <high probability game state <low probability short-time game state <big hit game. (Appeal power, conspicuousness) may be increased, or the order may be other. Further, the display mode of the launch operation information during the low-probability short-time gaming state and the high-probability gaming state may be the same, or the launch operation information during the normal gaming state, the low-probability short-time gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state. The display mode may be the same. Furthermore, the display mode of the launch operation information during the jackpot game is different from that during the high-probability game state or the low-probability short-time game state only during the opening, and during the round game or the interval, the high-probability game state or the low-probability short-time game state is in progress. It may be the same as inside.

In addition, if the left-handed information is displayed for a predetermined period after the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 in the normal game state in order to warn the right-handed person in the normal game state, the accuracy is low. The display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) may be different depending on whether the left-handed information is displayed for a predetermined period after the end of the time-saving game state.

If the display mode of the game information (launch operation information, number of consecutive villas information, advantageous period information) is different over the entire period of the game state (normal game state, high probability game state, low probability short game state, jackpot game). There may be a period in which the same display mode is used instead of the display mode. For example, the same display mode is used for a predetermined period (elapse of a predetermined time, execution of a predetermined number of fluctuation displays) from the start of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state, and then the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state. The display mode may be different until the end of the above, and vice versa. Further, these two types of periods may be alternately generated, starting from a period in which the game information is displayed in the same display mode or a period in which the game information is displayed in different display modes.

In addition, the display mode of predetermined game information (launch operation information, consecutive villa count information, at least one of advantageous period information) is different depending on the game state, and other game information (launch operation information, consecutive villa count information). , The display mode of (remaining advantageous period information) may be the same regardless of the gaming state.

Further, the predetermined game information (launch operation information, the number of consecutive villas information, and at least one of the advantageous period information) may be displayed intermittently instead of being continuously displayed during the display target period. However, the normal production period (for example, other than during SP / SPSP reach production and pseudo-continuous production) is displayed, and the specific production period (SP / SPSP reach production, pseudo-continuous production) is not displayed. May be good. For example, the launch operation information (right-handed information) may be continuously displayed regardless of the effect period, and the number of consecutive villas information and the advantageous period information may be displayed in a specific effect period.

Although the display positions of the game information (launch operation information, number of consecutive villas information, advantageous period information) are the same regardless of the game state, they may be different depending on the game state. For example, the launch operation information (left-handed information, right-handed information) is displayed in the left area of the image display device 14 during the normal game state, and is displayed in the low-probability short-time game state, the high-probability game state, and the jackpot game (round). ) May be displayed in the right area of the image display device 14. In addition, the information on the number of consecutive villas is displayed on one side of the image display device 14 during the low-probability short-time game state and the high-probability game state, and is displayed on the upper and lower sides of the image display device 14 during the big hit game. It is good to do. Further, the advantageous period information (high-probability remaining number of times information, time-saving remaining number of times information) is displayed on one side above and below the image display device 14 during the high-probability gaming state, and the image display device 14 is displayed during the low-probability time-saving gaming state. It is recommended to display it on the upper and lower sides of.

In addition, the display position of the predetermined game information (launch operation information, consecutive villa count information, at least one of the advantageous period information) is the same regardless of the game state, and other game information (launch operation information, consecutive villa count information). , The display position of (the rest of the advantageous period information) may be different depending on the game state.

Further, when two image display devices are provided, the image display devices to be displayed may be different depending on the type of game information. For example, predetermined game information (launch operation information, consecutive villa count information, at least one of advantageous period information) is displayed on the first image display device, and other game information (launch operation information, consecutive villa count information, advantageous period) is displayed. The rest of the information) may be displayed on the second image display device.

In addition, an image display device that displays game information according to the game state (normal game state, high-probability game state, low-probability short-time game state, jackpot game) and production state (whether or not SP / SPSP reach effect). The type of may be changed. For example, in a predetermined game state (normal game state, high probability game state, low probability short game state, at least one of jackpot games) and production state (other than SP / SP reach production), predetermined game information (launch operation information, (At least one of advantageous period information and number of consecutive villas information) is displayed on the first image display device, and other gaming states (normal gaming state, high-probability gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state, remaining jackpot game) and production. In the state (SP / SP reach effect), predetermined game information may be displayed on the second image display device.

Further, when three image display devices are provided, the image display devices to be displayed may be different depending on the type of game information. For example, it is preferable to display the launch operation information on the first image display device, display the information on the number of consecutive villas on the second image display device, and display the advantageous period information on the third image display device.

The types of game information include right-handed information, number of consecutive villas, high-probability remaining number of times, time-saving remaining number of times, and left-handed information. Alternatively, the game information may include a background image that informs (suggests) the game state to the player.

(Display example of the image display device in each game state)
Next, a display example of the image display device 14 in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 (a) is a display example during a normal gaming state (effect mode A), and FIG. 78 (b) is a display example during a high-probability gaming state (effect mode B), FIG. 78 (c). Is a display example during a low-probability short-time gaming state (effect mode C), and FIG. 78 (d) is a display example during a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), during the normal gaming state, the effect mode image AMG indicating that the effect mode A is set is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit 140 is displayed. Three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center, and three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area. To.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), during the high-probability gaming state, the effect mode image BMG indicating that the effect mode B is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit 140 is displayed. The right-handed image KMG, which is the above-mentioned display mode for high accuracy, is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140, and the jackpot number of consecutive villas image KRG, which is the above-mentioned display mode for high accuracy, is displayed near the center of the upper part of the display unit 140. The high-probability remaining number image KKG, which is the display mode for high accuracy described above, is displayed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the central portion of the display unit 140. Then, three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area 143.

As shown in FIG. 78 (c), during the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the effect mode image CMG indicating that the effect mode C is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit is displayed. The right-handed image ZMG, which is the above-mentioned time-saving display mode, is displayed on the upper right side of the 140, and the jackpot consecutive villa number image ZRG, which is the above-mentioned time-saving display mode, is displayed near the center of the upper part of the display unit 140. On the lower left side of the display unit 140, the time reduction remaining number image ZKG, which is the display mode for time reduction described above, is displayed, and in the center of the display unit 140, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side, and the display unit is displayed. Three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of 140 and the second hold icon display area 143.

As shown in FIG. 78 (d), during the jackpot game (during the opening), the right-handed image OMG, which is the display mode during the jackpot described above, is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. An opening image OPG indicating that the opening of the jackpot game is displayed is displayed on the remaining portion of the display unit 140.

The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, which are mainly displayed during the normal game state (waiting for the customer, during the variable effect of the normal reach or less, which is frequently executed, etc.), are a vertically long rectangular pattern base image ZBG and nine types of characters. It is a composite image in which a character image CYG showing any of the above and an identification image SG showing any number 1 to 9 corresponding to 9 types of characters on a one-to-one basis are superimposed, and is highly decorative (). The design is complicated, there are many colors, bright colors, etc.) It is the effect symbol (first effect symbol) of the first display mode.

The character image CYG is a single image that imitates any of nine types of characters, and the identification image SG superimposes a hexagonal base image and a numerical image (identifier) of any one of 1 to 9. It is a composite image that has been made to.

The effect symbol of the first display mode may be stored in the CGROM105Bb as a single symbol data, or the symbol-based image ZBG, the character image CYG, and the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM105Bb to store the image. It may be synthesized when displaying on the display device 14. Further, the base image and the numerical image constituting the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb and combined when displayed on the image display device 14.

The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 mainly displayed during the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state (during customer waiting effect waiting, during all variable effects) are numerical images (identifiers) of any one of 1 to 9. It is a single image with only a single image, and is less decorative than the first display mode (simple design, less color, dark colors, etc.), and is a production pattern (second production pattern) of the second display mode. ..

The effect symbol in the second display mode is stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data, but has the same shape (form) as the numerical image constituting the identification image SG in the effect symbol in the first display mode. Therefore, when the numerical image is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the same image data may be used and displayed on the image display device 14. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being compressed.

The special effect symbol TZ4 displayed in the normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state, and the low-probability short-time gaming state superimposes a hexagonal base image and a numerical image (identifier) of any one of 1 to 9. It is a composite image, which is less decorative than the first display mode, but more decorative than the second display mode (complex design, many colors, bright colors, etc.). It is the third production design).

The effect symbol in the third display mode is stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data, but since it has the same shape (form) as the identification image SG in the effect symbol in the first display mode, the identification is performed. When the image SG is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the same image data may be used and displayed on the image display device 14. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being compressed.

As described above, the types of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (basic display mode) mainly displayed in the normal game state (effect mode A), and the high-probability game state (effect mode B) and the low-probability short-time gaming state (the effect mode B). By differentiating the types (basic display modes) of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that are mainly displayed in the effect mode C), the effect symbols displayed on the image display device 14 when the gaming state changes. It is possible to change the display mode of the game and improve the interest of the game.

(Display example of production design in variable production)
Next, a display example of the effect symbol in the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 82.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display example in which a variation effect by the variation effect pattern A001 (normal variation without pseudo fanning) is executed in the normal game state (effect mode A).

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the image display device 14 has the effect symbols (first effect symbols) "1", "3", and "5" of the three first display modes showing loss as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Is stopped and displayed, and as the special effect symbol TZ4, the effect symbols (third effect symbol) "1", "3", and "5" corresponding to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed. ing.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the hold icon A00 in the normal mode displayed on the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display area 141 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon A00. Then, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start the variable display. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 also starts variable display.

As shown in FIG. 79 (c), when the effect symbol "1" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1, the character image CYG of the effect symbol "1" in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The action effect at the time of stopping (changing the display mode) is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the left symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 79 (d), when the effect symbol "9" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ3, the character image CYG of the effect symbol "9" in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The stop action effect is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the right symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 79 (e), when the effect symbol "4" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ2, the character image CYG of the effect symbol "4" in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The stop action effect is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the middle symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 79 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the temporary stop of the effect symbol "4" in the first display mode as the effect symbol TZ2, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are first. The effect symbols "1", "4", and "9" in the display mode are stopped and displayed. Along with this, as the special effect symbol TZ4, the effect symbols "1", "4", and "9" of the three third display modes corresponding to the effect symbols "1", "4", and "9" of the first display mode are stopped and displayed. , The fluctuation production ends.

In this way, when the variation effect pattern A001 (normal variation without pseudo fanning) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are the first for the entire period from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation. It is designed to be displayed by the effect symbol (first effect symbol) of the display mode. Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the stop action effect is performed by the character image CYG of the effect symbol of the first display mode.

As for the variable effect patterns without reach such as the variable effect pattern A002, the variable effect pattern A003, the variable effect pattern A021, and the variable effect pattern A024, as in the case of the above-mentioned variable effect pattern A001, from the start to the variable stop. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols (first effect symbols) in the first display mode over the entire period of. Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the stop action effect is performed by the character image CYG of the effect symbol of the first display mode.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect by increasing the movement of the effect symbol while enhancing the decorativeness of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the period when the variable effect without reach is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a display example when the variation effect pattern A000 (shortening variation without pseudo fanning) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A).

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the hold icons A00 to A03 of the normal mode displayed in the first display units 141a to 4 of the first hold icon display area 141 are shifted toward the changing icon display area 142. Then, when the hold icon A00 becomes the changing icon A00, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the first display mode start the variable display. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 in the third display mode also starts variable display.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the effect symbol "1" in the first display mode temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ1 without performing the action effect at the time of stop, and the effect symbols TZ2 and TZ3 The effect symbols "4" and "9" are displayed in a fluctuating manner at low speed. At this time, the left symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 80 (c), when a predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the effect symbol TZ1, the effect symbol "9" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ3 without performing the action effect at the time of stop, and the effect is produced. When a predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the symbol TZ3, the effect symbol "4" in the first display mode temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ2 without performing the action effect at the time of stop. At this time, the middle symbol and the right symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbols TZ2 and TZ3 do not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 80 (d), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the temporary stop of the effect symbol "4" in the first display mode as the effect symbol TZ2, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 become the first. The effect symbols "1", "4", and "9" in the display mode are stopped and displayed. Along with this, as the special effect symbol TZ4, the effect symbols "1", "4", and "9" of the three third display modes corresponding to the effect symbols "1", "4", and "9" of the first display mode are stopped and displayed. , The fluctuation production ends.

In this way, when the variation effect pattern A000 (pseudo-less shortened variation) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are the first over the entire period from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. It is designed to be displayed by the effect symbol (first effect symbol) of one display mode. Further, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped, the stop action effect by the character image CYG of the effect symbol of the first display mode is not performed.

As for the variable effect pattern A020 (zone fanning failure 1 shortened variation) and the variable effect pattern A023 (zone fanning failure 2 shortened variation), as in the case of the above-mentioned variable effect pattern A000, the entire process from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation Over a period of time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols (first effect symbols) in the first display mode. Further, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped, the stop action effect by the character image CYG of the effect symbol of the first display mode is not performed.

By doing so, the movements of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the shortened variation effect executed during the normal gaming state are less than the movements of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal variation effect, and the distinctiveness (visual recognition) of the effect symbols is reduced. (Sex) can be ensured, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the difficulty in identifying the production pattern.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a display example when the variable effect pattern A006 (SP reach 1 effect) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A).

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the hold icon A00 in the normal mode displayed on the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display area 141 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon A00. Then, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the first display mode start the variable display. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 in the third display mode also starts variable display.

As shown in FIG. 81 (b), when the effect symbol "1" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1, the character image CYG of the effect symbol "1" in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The action effect at the time of stopping (changing the display mode) is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the left symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 81 (c), when the effect symbol "1" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ3, the character image CYG of the effect symbol "9" in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The stop action effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the normal reach effect is performed. At this time, the right symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 81 (d), the transition effect (development effect) suggesting the development to a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) (executed in the process of developing into the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that are executed are moved to the upper right side of the screen and displayed in a reduced size, and are the same as in the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Changes to. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not change as the effect symbol of the third display mode, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 81 (e), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the transition effect, the effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed and the SP reach effect is started. To. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 continue to be variablely displayed as the effect symbols in the second display mode, and the special effect symbols TZ4 continue to be variablely displayed as the effect symbols in the third display mode.

As shown in FIG. 81 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the SP reach effect, a character image indicating that the ally character has won the battle is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol TZ2 that has been variablely displayed on the upper right side of the screen temporarily stops at the effect symbol "1" in the second display mode, and the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that notify the jackpot is displayed. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not change as the effect symbol of the third display mode, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the display of the character image indicating that the ally character has won the battle, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 move to their original positions. The image is enlarged to the normal size and returned to the effect symbol (first effect symbol) of the first display mode, and the action effect at the time of stop is performed in the temporarily stopped state. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not change as the effect symbol of the third display mode, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 81 (h), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the stop action effect, the effect symbols "1" in the first display mode are used as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the jackpot. "1" and "1" are stopped and displayed. Along with this, as the special effect symbol TZ4, the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" of the three third display modes corresponding to the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" of the first display mode are stopped and displayed. , The fluctuation production ends.

In this way, when the variable effect pattern A006 (SP reach 1 effect) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the period from the start of the variation to the execution of the transition effect and the specific reach effect (here, the specific reach effect). During the period from the end of the SP reach effect) to the stop display, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols (first effect symbol) of the first display mode, and the SP reach effect is performed after the transition effect is started. During the period until the end, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols (second effect symbols) in the second display mode. Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 before the start of the transition effect and after the end of the SP reach effect, the stop action effect is performed by the effect symbol of the first display mode.

As for the variation effect patterns such as the variation effect patterns A007 to A017, A034 to A040, and A054 to A060, which are equal to or higher than the SP reach effect, the transition effect is executed from the start of the change as in the case of the above-mentioned variation effect pattern A006. During the period from the end of the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) to the stop display, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols (first effect symbol) in the first display mode, and the transition is made. During the period from the start of the effect to the end of the SP reach effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols (second effect symbols) in the second display mode. Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 before the start of the transition effect and after the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect, the stop action effect is performed by the effect symbol of the first display mode.

By doing so, during the period when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the normal size, the effect of the variable effect can be obtained by increasing the movement of the effect symbols while enhancing the decorativeness of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. While improving, during the period when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in reduced size, the distinctiveness (visibility) of the effect symbols is improved by reducing the movement of the effect symbols while lowering the decorativeness of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. It can be secured and the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the normal gaming state, the effect symbols are displayed in a reduced size for most of the period other than the period (the period from the transition effect to the SP / SPSP reach effect). Since the effect symbols of the first display mode are displayed as TZ1 to TZ3, it can be said that the basic display mode of the effect symbols in the normal gaming state is the first display mode.

Although the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbols TZ4 are not displayed during the customer waiting effect in the normal gaming state, the effect symbols may be displayed in the first display mode when the effect symbols are displayed during the customer waiting effect. However, it may be displayed in the second display mode or the third display mode, but the basic display mode of the effect symbol in the normal gaming state remains the same as the first display mode.

Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols in the first display mode after the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect, but the display of the effect symbols in the second display mode is continued. You may do so. Further, when the result of the variable effect is lost, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols of the first display mode after the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect, while when the result of the variable effect is a big hit, the SP is displayed. After the / SPSP reach effect is completed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed according to the second display mode, or vice versa. Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may not be changed as the effect symbols in the first display mode.

It should be noted that, in the normal gaming state, a plurality of effect modes for changing based on the operation of the effect button 18A by the player or changing based on the establishment of the change condition are provided, and a plurality of types of first display modes of the effect symbols are provided. The type of the first display mode of the effect symbol to be displayed on the image display device 14 may be changed according to the type of the effect mode in the gaming state. Even in this case, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed in the second display mode (common display mode) during the period from the start of the transition effect to the end of the SP reach effect.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a display example in which a variation effect by the variation effect pattern B001 (no pseudo fanning) is executed in a high probability gaming state (effect mode B).

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the image display device 14 has the effect symbols (second effect symbols) "1", "3", and "5" of the three second display modes showing the loss as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Is stopped and displayed, and as the special effect symbol TZ4, the effect symbols (third effect symbol) "1", "3", and "5" corresponding to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed. ing.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the hold icon A00 in the normal mode displayed on the first display unit 141a of the second hold icon display area 143 shifts to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon A00. Then, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start the variable display. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 also starts variable display.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the effect symbol “8” in the second display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 without performing the stop action effect. At this time, the left symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 82 (d), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect symbol TZ1 is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol "5" in the second display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ3 without performing the action effect at the time of stop. .. At this time, the right symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 82 (e), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect symbol TZ3 is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol "2" in the second display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ2 without performing the action effect at the time of stop. .. At this time, the middle symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

As shown in FIG. 82 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the temporary stop of the effect symbol "2" in the second display mode as the effect symbol TZ2, the second display pattern TZ1 to TZ3 are second. The effect symbols "8", "2", and "5" in the display mode are stopped and displayed, and the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the loss is displayed. Along with this, as the special effect symbol TZ4, the effect symbols "8", "2", and "5" of the three third display modes corresponding to the effect symbols "8", "2", and "5" of the second display mode are stopped and displayed. , The fluctuation production ends.

In this way, when the variable effect pattern B001 (normal variation without pseudo fanning) is executed in the high-probability gaming state (effect mode B), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are the first during the entire period from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation. It is designed to be displayed by the effect symbol (second effect symbol) of the two display modes. Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the stop action effect by the effect symbol of the second display mode is not performed.

It should be noted that the other variable effect patterns in the high-probability gaming state (effect mode B) and all the variable effect patterns in the low-probability short-time gaming state (effect mode C) also vary as in the case of the above-mentioned variable effect pattern B001. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols (second effect symbols) in the second display mode over the entire period from the start to the stop of fluctuation. Further, at the time of temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the stop action effect by the effect symbol of the second display mode is not performed.

By doing so, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect (variation display) that is executed is likely to be shorter than that of the normal gaming state (the ultra-shortening variation is likely to be executed). By reducing the movement of the production symbols while lowering the decorativeness of the symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the distinctiveness (visibility) of the production symbols can be ensured, and it is difficult to identify the production symbols, which reduces the interest of the game. Can be prevented.

Further, in any of the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the high-probability gaming state (effect mode B), and the low-probability short-time gaming state (effect mode C), the effect symbol (third effect symbol) of the third display mode is used. ) Is displayed in the special effect symbol TZ4 so that the action effect at the time of stop is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of seeing the special effect symbols TZ4, which are smaller than the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp (recognize) the progress state of the variable display.

As described above, in the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state, the production symbols in the second display mode are displayed as the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the waiting for the customer waiting effect or during the execution period of all the variable effects. Therefore, it can be said that the basic display mode of the effect symbol during the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state is the second display mode.

The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbols TZ4 are not displayed during the customer waiting effect in the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state, but the first display is displayed when the effect symbol is displayed during the customer waiting effect. It may be displayed in a mode, a second display mode, or a third display mode, but it may be displayed in a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability short-time gaming state. The display mode of is the same as that of the second display mode.

In addition, the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state are divided into multiple periods (early stage, middle stage and final stage, first half and second half, etc.), and multiple types of second display modes of the production symbols are provided to provide the high-probability gaming state and low probability gaming state. The type of the second display mode of the effect symbol to be displayed on the image display device 14 may be changed according to the type of the period in the probability short game state. In this case, the effect symbol of the second display mode common to a plurality of periods may be displayed during the execution of the SP / SPSP reach effect, or the effect symbol of the type corresponding to the period may be displayed. It may be displayed.

In the present embodiment, the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed in the third display mode in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the high-probability gaming state (effect mode B), and the low-probability short-time gaming state (effect mode C). Although it was designed to be displayed in the (third effect symbol), the effect of the second display mode such as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the high-probability gaming state (effect mode B) and the low-probability time-saving gaming state (effect mode C). It may be displayed as a symbol (second effect symbol).

Further, in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), during the period in which the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed as the effect symbols (second effect symbol) in the second display mode. However, it may be displayed by the effect symbol (third effect symbol) of the third display mode as in the special effect symbol TZ4.

Further, the basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal game state (effect mode A) is set as the first display mode, and the effect in the high-probability game state (effect mode B) and the low-probability time-saving game state (effect mode C). The basic display mode of the symbols TZ1 to TZ3 was set as the second display mode, but the basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal gaming state is set to the third display mode, which is more decorative than the second display mode, and is high. The basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the stochastic game state and the low-probability short-time game state may be the second display mode. In this case, it is preferable to display the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the second display mode from the transition effect in the variable effect executed in the normal gaming state to the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect.

Further, in the normal game state (effect mode A), when the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is completed and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are returned to the normal size, the stop action effect is performed. However, the stop action effect may not be performed, or the stop action effect may be performed in the case of a big hit and the stop action effect may not be performed in the case of a loss.

Further, instead of notifying the result of the variable effect (variable display) by the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the variable effect (variable display) is performed by the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the three special effect symbols TZ4. The result of may be notified.

In addition, the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 when the variable effect (variable display) is completed are made to be the same, but in the case of a big hit, the effect symbols TZ1 to Make sure that the combination of TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 are the same, and if there is a loss, the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 may be different. May be good. In that case, the number of patterns in the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 may be larger or smaller than the number of patterns in the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3.

Although the change in the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 when there is a change in the gaming state is not mentioned, here, a predetermined return condition (in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of times of variation display is executed) is executed. However, it may be replaced with winning a fall lottery, etc.), and a brief explanation will be given regarding the case of returning to the normal gaming state from a specific gaming state such as a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability short-time gaming state. Keep it.

When returning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined return condition, the end of the last variation display executed in the specific gaming state (during the symbol stop time) or the first time of the next variation display. Only the effect image for shielding the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14 (for example, the stage change image for switching the background image of the display unit 140 and the effect symbol) during (before the start of fluctuation or during the fluctuation acceleration period). A movable member for displaying an effect (such as a dedicated effect image for switching) or for shielding the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14 (a state of being located in front of the effect symbol and a state of retracting from the front). It is preferable to switch the shielded (visually restricted) effect symbol of the second display mode to the effect symbol of the first display mode in accordance with the execution of the predetermined effect such as the effect of operating the convertible member). It should be noted that the predetermined effect may not be an effect that shields the effect symbol, but may be an effect that can attract the attention of the player.

(Display example from operation production fanning to operation production)
Next, a display example from the operation effect fanning to the operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84.

FIG. 83A is a diagram showing a display example of a gassing fanning effect executed during the first normal reach effect when the operation effect scenario A8-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

First, as shown in FIG. 83 (a-1), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at the same effect symbol "1" on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, the normal reach effect is started. Image 1A-1 or accelerated image 1A-2 is displayed, which is a sign that the validity period may occur. Image AG1 (a dark image consisting of the base image AG of the first form and the button image BG in the normal state). ) Moves from the upper right to the lower left of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (a-2), the normal reach effect continues, but the fanned image AG1 that has moved to the lower left of the screen disappears out of the screen, and the effect button 18A does not occur for a valid period. The non-luminous state is maintained. As a result, the player recognizes (grasps) that the executed operation effect fanning was a sloppy fanning effect.

FIG. 83B is a display example from the operation effect fanning to the operation effect executed during the second normal reach effect when the operation effect scenario A8-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-1), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at the same effect symbol "1" on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, the normal reach effect is started. The screen is a fanned image AG1 (a dark or translucent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promoted image 1A) that predicts that the valid period may occur by displaying the image 1A-1 or the promoted image 1A-2. A fanning effect A that moves from the upper right to the lower left is executed. Up to this point, since the production mode is the same as that of the Gase fanning effect, the player cannot grasp whether the effect is the Gase fanning effect or the fanning effect A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-2), the fanning effect A continuously moves to the lower left of the screen while the normal reach effect continues, and the fanning image AG1 moves so as to fold back toward the center of the screen. , The accelerated image 1A-1 is displayed in place of the fanned image AG1. At this time, the effect button 18A emits white light and an effective period is generated, and the gauge width of the gauge image of the accelerated image 1A-1 is reduced according to the remaining time of the effective period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, the promotion image 1A-1 displayed in the center of the screen while the normal reach effect is continued is displayed. The operation effect (flower blizzard 3) is executed by displaying an image in which a large amount of petals are scattered over a predetermined period as the light emission and the effective period of the effect button 18A are terminated. As a result, the player is notified of the expectation level of the jackpot winning (the jackpot game is executed) in the variable effect (variable effect) being executed.

As described above, the Gase fanning effect and the fanning effect A are the effects that the promotion image is displayed and the expectation that the valid period may occur is expected. Therefore, by executing the fanning effect and the fanning effect A, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the valid period can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the frustration effect and the fanning effect A are executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, it is a sign that the promotion image 2A (2A-1 to 2A-3) is displayed due to the valid period. The fanned image AG3 (dark or translucent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the accelerated image 2A) is displayed.

FIG. 84A is a display example from the operation effect fanning to the operation effect executed during the SPSP reach effect when the operation effect scenario A8-2 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

First, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-1), at a predetermined timing during the SPSP reach effect, an effective period occurs on the front side of the heart-shaped effect image, and the promotion image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A A fan image AG1 that predicts that -2 will be displayed, and a fan image AG2 (gauge image from the promotion image 1B) that predicts that the promotion image 1B-1 or the promotion image 1B-2 will be displayed due to an effective period. The dark color or translucent image excluding the CG) and the image) move in a ring shape, so that the fanning effect B is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-2), the fanning effect B ends while the SPSP reach effect continues, and the radial effect image and the promotion image 1A are replaced with the fanning image AG1 and the fanning image AG2. -2 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 18A emits yellow light and an effective period is generated, and the gauge width of the gauge image of the accelerated image 1A-2 is reduced according to the remaining time of the effective period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, the promotion image 1A-2 displayed in the center of the screen while the SPSP reach effect continues. When the display, light emission and validity period of the effect button 18A are terminated, the background and / or the edge is green and the cut-in image CIG by the character 2 is displayed for a predetermined period, so that the operation effect (green cut-in 2) is displayed. Will be executed. As a result, the player is notified of the expectation level of the jackpot winning (the jackpot game is executed) in the variable effect (variable effect) being executed.

FIG. 84B is a display example from the operation effect fanning to the operation effect executed during the SPSP reach effect when the operation effect scenario A8-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

First, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-1), at a predetermined timing during the SPSP reach effect, an effective period occurs on the front side of the heart-shaped effect image, and the promotion image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A The fanning image AG1 that predicts that -2 is displayed and the fanning image AG2 that predicts that the promotion image 1B-1 or the promotion image 1B-2 is displayed due to an effective period move in a ring shape. By doing so, the fanning effect B is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-2), the fanning effect B ends while the SPSP reach effect continues, and the radial effect image and the promotion image 1B are replaced with the fanning image AG1 and the fanning image AG2. -2 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 18A changes from the normal state to the projecting state, the effect button 18A in the projecting state emits yellow light, and an effective period occurs. The gauge width of the gauge image is reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, the promotion image 1B-2 displayed in the center of the screen while the SPSP reach effect continues. When the display, light emission and validity period of the effect button 18A are terminated, the background and / or the edge is red and the cut-in image CIG by the character 2 is displayed for a predetermined period, so that the operation effect (red cut-in 2) is displayed. Will be executed. As a result, the player is notified of the expectation level of the jackpot winning (the jackpot game is executed) in the variable effect (variable effect) being executed.

As described above, the fanning effect B is an effect in which it is confirmed that the promotion image is displayed after the valid period occurs, and the type of the promotion image to be displayed is predicted (notified). Therefore, by executing the fanning effect B, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to which type of promotion image is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the fanning effect B is executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, the fanning image AG3 predicts that the promotion image 2A (2A-1 to 2A-3) is displayed due to the occurrence of the valid period. , A fan image AG4 (dark or translucent image excluding the gauge image from the promotion image 2B), which predicts that the promotion image 2B (2B-1 to 2B-3) will be displayed due to the occurrence of the validity period, the validity period Image AG5 (dark or translucent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promotion image 3A), which is a sign that the promotion image 3A (3A-1 to 3A-3) is displayed, and the validity period occurs. Then, any of the four images AG6 (dark or translucent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promoted image 3B), which is a sign that the promoted image 3B (3B-1 to 3B-3) is displayed. Or two are selectively displayed.

That is, in the fanning effect B executed in the effect modes A to C, one fanning image corresponding to the promotion image displayed during the valid period generated thereafter corresponds to the promotion image displayed during the valid period. One other fanned image is displayed. For example, when the promotion image 2A-1 is displayed during the valid period in the effect mode B, any one of the fanned images AG3 and the fanned images AG4 to AG6 is displayed as the other images. By doing so, there is no obvious contradiction between the fanned image displayed on the image display device 14 and the promoted image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of randomly determining other fanning images displayed when the fanning effect B is executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, it may be determined according to the expectation of winning a big hit. ..

Specifically, the expectation of the jackpot winning when the fanning image is displayed is the fanning image AG3 <fanning image AG4 <fanning image AG5 <fanning image AG6, so the lower the expectation of the jackpot winning, the higher the expectation. It is preferable that a low fanning image (for example, fanning image AG3) is easily selected, and a fanning image with a high expectation (for example, fanning image AG6) is more likely to be selected as the expectation of winning a big hit is higher. In this way, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning a big hit to the player by using other fanning images, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the fanning effect B is executed in the effect modes A to C, two or more other promotion images may be displayed instead of displaying only one. In this way, when the other fanning images are determined according to the expectation of the jackpot winning, it is possible to suggest the expectation of the jackpot winning in more detail.

Further, with respect to the Gase fanning effect, the fanning effect A, and the fanning effect B executed in the effect modes A to C, the effect mode is the same except for the type of the displayed fanning image, but each effect mode has the same effect mode. They may have different production modes, or the two production modes may have the same production mode, while the remaining one production mode may have different production modes. By doing so, the production mode of the fanning effect will be diversified, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

As for the fanned image and the promoted image, the fanned image is displayed so as not to overlap in front of the reduced effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed on the left side of the screen and the special effect symbol TZ4 displayed on the lower right side of the screen. It may be displayed in a layer behind the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap with at least one of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4.

(Notice of handshake event)
Next, the handshake event notice will be described. The handshake event notice is composed of a combination of the hold icon change notice and the changing icon change notice, and the changing icon is displayed by the handshake event (operation including conversation) between the changing icon and the predetermined character, which is a special mode. It is a preliminary judgment of whether or not the expectation of the jackpot winning of the jackpot judgment (special symbol lottery) corresponding to the changing icon is improved (so-called chance up or not) by changing the mode. It is a kind of pre-reading notice (continuous notice production) performed based on the result. First, the production flow of the handshake event notice will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

When the changing icon that is the target of the handshake event notice is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 and the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is started, the changing icon display area 142 is first used as the handshake event notice. A handshake event venue will appear in the vicinity of, and a handshake character that shakes hands with the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon and an escort character that escorts the handshake character will appear at a predetermined position on the display unit 140.

Then, when the handshake character and the changing icon shake hands and a predetermined line appears from the handshake character with the handshake, the color gradually starts to change from the bottom of the changing icon, and the color of the changing icon changes. An effect of whether or not the icon changes (whether or not the display mode of the changing icon changes) (hereinafter referred to as "changing icon color change fanning effect") is executed. When the color changes completely (successful color change), it becomes a so-called "promotion success (chance up)", and the expectation of winning a big hit for the changing icon rises, while the color change ends in the middle. When the color returns to the color before the effect of changing the color of the changing icon (color change fails), a so-called "promotion failure" occurs, and the expectation of winning a big hit for the changing icon is maintained.

When the first changing icon color change fanning effect is completed, the second dialogue will appear again from the handshake character and the handshake event notice will continue, and the escort character will give an exit guide to the changing icon. And when the notice of the handshake event ends, it will be branched.

When the second dialogue appears from the handshake character again and the notice of the handshake event continues, the icon color change fanning effect during the second change is executed. Then, as in the case of the first time, the color of the icon during the second change is completely changed (the color change is successful) and the promotion is successful (chance up), or the color change is in the middle. It ends (color change fails) and promotion fails.

Then, when the second changing icon color change fanning effect is completed, the third dialogue appears from the handshake character again, and the handshake event notice continues, and the escort character leaves the changing icon. It will be branched when the handshake event notice ends after the guidance is given.

When the third dialogue appears from the handshake character and the notice of the handshake event continues, the third changing icon color change fanning effect is executed. Then, as in the case of the first and second times, the color of the icon during the third change is completely changed and the promotion is successful (chance up), or the color change ends in the middle. Promotion fails.

Then, when the third changing icon color change fanning effect is completed, the fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake event notice continues, and the escort character gives an exit guide to the changing icon. It will be branched when the handshake event notice ends.

When the 4th dialogue appears from the handshake character and the notice of the handshake event continues, in the 4th changing icon color change fanning production, the color always changes completely and promotion is successful (chance up). The escort character gives an exit guide to the changing icon, and the handshake event notice ends.

Next, the handshake event notice will be described using a specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 88A, when the hold icons A10 to A12 of the normal mode are displayed in the first display units 141a to the third display unit 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, the loss is caused. It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol shown is performed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 88 (b) to 88 (c), the hold icons A10 to A12 displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c are the changing icon display areas 142 and the first. Along with shifting to the display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon A10 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A10 becomes the changing icon A10.

Then, when the variable display of the effect symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is being executed, the game ball enters the first starting port 6, a new first special symbol hold occurs, and the first The first start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of the special figure hold, and it is determined that the handshake event notice is executed in the start opening winning process, and the number of lines of the handshake event notice is twice. "4th special mode 21 at the time of winning → The color of the changing icon changes to green (4th special mode 12) in the first dialogue → The color of the changing icon in the second dialogue changes to red (4th) It is assumed that the icon display mode scenario for handshake event notice of the effect content changing to the special mode 13) is selected.

In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 89A, the hold icon A13 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the fourth special aspect 21. At this time, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A10 does not change, but the hold icons A11 and A12 corresponding to the advance hold for the newly generated first special figure hold are the fourth special. Along with the change to the aspect 41, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the handshake event venue AK appears in the vicinity of the changing icon display area 142 while being partially hidden by the effect EF1.

By executing the handshake event notice based on the occurrence of the first special figure hold, the hold icon A13 is displayed in the fourth special aspect 21, and the hold icons A11 and A12 are displayed in the fourth special aspect 41. However, in order for the player to easily recognize the target of the handshake event notice, a heart is attached to the chest part of the silhouette of the person related to the hold icon A13, which is the target of the handshake event notice. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), when the effect EF1 is erased, the handshake character C1 that shakes the handshake according to the handshake event notice and the escort character C2 that escorts the handshake character C1 are sent to the handshake event venue AK. Appear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed, and the changing icon A10 is erased, corresponding to the hold icon A11 as shown in FIG. 90 (b). When the variable display of the effect symbol to be performed is started, the hold icons A11 to A13 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display units 141a and 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A11 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon A11 changes to the changing icon A11, and the display mode changes from the fourth special mode 41 to the fourth special mode 31 with the shift. Change.

Further, as soon as the changing icon A11 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, as shown in FIG. 90B, the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A11 and the handshake character C1 shake hands. Here, since the changing icon A11 is not the target of the suggestion of the jackpot winning expectation related to the handshake event notice, the dialogue does not appear from the handshake character C1, and the display mode (color) of the changing icon A11 also changes. do not do.

As shown in FIGS. 90 (b) and 90 (c), the hold icon A13 of the fourth special aspect 21, the hold icon A12 of the fourth special aspect 41, and the changing icon A11 of the fourth special aspect 31 are displayed. In other words, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 while the handshake event notice suggestion effect is being executed, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the entry is displayed in the normal mode. To.

This occurs because, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake event notice is to be executed, the ball has entered the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 by the end of the handshake event notice. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold. However, the icon display mode determined by permitting the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold generated by entering the first starting port 6 or the like by the end of the handshake event notice. It is also possible to display the hold icon A14 in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

Just before the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the changing icon A11 ends, the escort character C2 performs an operation of checking the clock as shown in FIG. 90 (d), and the variation display of the effect symbol ends. Suggest that. Then, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the change start to stop, as shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (b), the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation with respect to the changing icon A11. Then, the handshake character C1 performs an action (bye-bye) to say goodbye to the changing icon A11, and the changing icon A11 is reduced as if leaving. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed, the changing icon A11 is completely erased, and the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 return to the standby state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92A, the hold icon A13, which is the object of the handshake event notice, is shifted from the first display unit 141a to the changing icon display area 142, and the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 11 is changed. When it becomes A13, the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A13 and the handshake character C1 immediately shake hands.

As shown in FIG. 92A, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6 while the handshake event notice is being executed, the hold icon A15 corresponding to the entry is displayed in the normal mode. Will be done. This occurs because, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake event notice is to be executed, the ball has entered the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 by the end of the handshake event notice. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold. However, the icon display mode determined by permitting the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold generated by entering the first starting port 6 or the like by the end of the handshake event notice. It is also possible to display the hold icon A14 in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

When the handshake between the changing icon A13 and the handshake character C1 of the fourth special aspect 11 is performed, the first dialogue appears from the handshake character C1 as shown in FIG. 92 (b), and FIG. 92 (c) shows. As shown in the above, the changing icon color change effect is executed, in which the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, from white to green). Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), when the color of the changing icon A13 is completely changed and the color change is successful, the changing icon A13 makes a guts pose and the color change (promotion) is successful. The translucent effect EF2 suggesting the success of the color change is visually displayed on the changing icon A13.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), when the changing icon A13 continues to shake hands with the hand-shaking character C1 in the color (here, green) after the changing icon color change is caused by the first changing effect. , As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second dialogue appears from the handshake character C1, and the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, from green to red). A fanning effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), when the color of the changing icon A13 is completely changed and the color change is successful, the changing icon A13 makes a guts pose again to change (promote) the color. Perform actions that suggest success.

Here, as shown in FIG. 94A, the reach state is established, the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation for the changing icon A13, and the handshake character C1 separates from the changing icon A13. When it is notified that the handshake event notice is over, a predetermined reach effect (for example, normal reach) is started, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) to 94 (c). In addition, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are erased along with the execution of the development effect that develops into SP reach, and the display mode of the changing icon A13 displayed in the fourth special aspect 13 is red, which is the color at that time. The second special aspect 13 is changed to the common second special mode, the handshake event notice ends, and the SP reach is started.

As described above, the color of the changing icon (in a broad sense, the display mode) gradually changes due to the handshake event notice, and the changing icon color fanning effect of whether or not the color changes is performed. By displaying the color change process in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the changing icon and easily recognize the change of the color of the changing icon.

In the present embodiment, it is the color that changes as the target of the handshake event notice, but the change target is not limited to the color, and may be the size or shape of the changing icon. Further, it is also possible to appropriately combine a plurality of elements constituting the display mode of the changing icon such as color, size and shape to display the changing process. When multiple elements are combined appropriately, for example, the color changes when the first line appears, the size changes when the second line appears, and the shape changes when the third line appears. It is also possible to change the elements that change according to the order of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event notice is given based on the preliminary judgment result, but the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, or the special figure change of the special figure judgment information subject to the handshake event notice is given. It is also possible to perform this based on the pattern determination result.

Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect pattern, but the execution timing of the handshake event notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the effect content of the variable effect. can do. Other execution timings of the handshake event notice include temporary stop or re-variation of the pseudo-ream, step-up of the so-called step-up notice, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or super reach. It can be appropriately set when the development effect is executed, when the reach state is established, when the effect effect device 17 executes a predetermined operation effect, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event notice is given to the changing icon, but it can also be given to the hold icon. In this case, for example, the handshake event venue appears in the vicinity of any one of the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d, and is displayed on the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d where the handshake event venue appears. It is also possible to give a handshake event notice to the hold icon and display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, the method of determining the effect content of the handshake event notice in the icon display mode scenario determination for the handshake event notice in the present embodiment (steps S1307-4-7 to S1305-4-12, FIGS. 55 to 55). The handshake event notice can be given in the same manner as in FIG. 58).

Further, as another embodiment in which the handshake event notice is given, for example, the handshake character shakes hands in order with all or a part of the icons displayed at that time during the variable display of the effect symbol. By doing so, it is possible to give a handshake event notice and display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, for example, when the variable effect is started, it is possible to determine for which icon the handshake event notice is to be executed, and to determine the display mode after the change when the handshake event is executed. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, while the process of color change (change of display mode) of the icon is displayed, the icon and the hand-shaking character are shaking hands, in other words, the target icon of the color change. An action is executed for the target icon, but some action is performed once or multiple times before the color change target icon changes color, and the color changes after the action ends (for example, a predetermined character is used for the target icon). The color of the target icon changes after the kiss is completed), and the color change can be made easier as the number of actions increases.

Further, in the present embodiment, 1 to 4 lines appear for one handshake event notice, and one changing icon color change fanning effect is executed with the appearance of one line. To. Therefore, the greater the number of lines that appear in one handshake event notice, the higher the possibility of successful color change, in other words, the higher the chance of winning a big hit (chance up). By paying attention to the appearance of dialogue, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, in one handshake event notice, even if the color change fails due to a certain changing icon color change fanning effect, or even if the desired change is not achieved, when the next line appears, the player's color It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for changes (increased expectations for winning big hits).

In the present embodiment, one handshake event notice is executed in one variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol), but a plurality of handshake event notices are executed in one variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol). Can also be executed. The number of lines for each handshake event notice is determined by a scenario or an independent lottery, and the more lines that appear in the multiple handshake event notices, the more successful the color change. In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that the expectation of winning a big hit will increase (chance up).

In addition, the greater the number of dialogues, the higher the possibility of successful color change, which means that the time during which the handshake event is being shaken, in other words, the action is performed on the icon that is the target of the handshake event announcement. The longer the time spent, the higher the possibility of successful color change, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the handshake event notice is such that one or more lines appear while the handshake is being shaken once, the number of lines is due to the time when the handshake is held. However, for example, it is possible to make the production content in which one or a plurality of words are uttered in one line so that the time of shaking hands changes depending on the length of the words in one line.

Further, in the present embodiment, 1 to 4 lines appear for one handshake event notice, and one changing icon color change fanning effect is executed with the appearance of one line. To. Therefore, the greater the number of lines that appear in one handshake event notice, the higher the possibility of successful color change, in other words, the higher the possibility of increasing the expectation of winning a big hit (increasing chance).

Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event venue AK, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 that appear are set to one type, but a plurality of types are set for each, and the number of dialogues (the number of dialogues) is set according to the type that appears. It is also possible to make the number of steps of the handshake event notice), the time of shaking hands (the production time of the handshake event notice), and the degree of expectation of successful color change different.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first dialogue content, the second dialogue content, the third dialogue content, and the fourth dialogue content in the handshake event notice are set to be different from each other, and the dialogue content of each time is set to be different. Is set to one type. Here, a plurality of types of dialogue contents are set for each time, and it is possible to make the expectation of success in color change different depending on the dialogue contents. It is also possible to set the dialogue content depending on the type of handshake character. Further, the handshake character can be selected by the player by operating the selection button 19A and the effect button 18A during a preset period such as a customer waiting state.

(Throwing kiss notice)
Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described. The throwing kiss notice is composed of a hold icon change notice and / or a changing icon change notice, and the display mode of the icon is changed by a throwing kiss (a motion of flying a heart) by a predetermined character, and a hit corresponding to the changing icon. It is a notice effect of whether to improve the jackpot winning expectation of judgment (special symbol lottery) (so-called chance up or not), and is a kind of pre-reading notice performed based on the preliminary judgment result (hold icon). When it is executed by the change notice and the changing icon change notice, it can be said to be a continuous notice effect). First, the production flow of the throwing kiss notice will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

When the throwing kiss notice is started, a predetermined character first appears at a predetermined position on the display unit 140. In the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed with the start of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol.

The appearing character either performs a throwing kiss that shoots a heart toward any of the already displayed icons (holding icon or changing icon), or leaves without performing a throwing kiss and disappears from the display unit 140. When the character leaves and disappears from the display unit 140, the throwing kiss notice ends.

When a throwing kiss is performed by the character, a heart hits the icon targeted by the throwing kiss, and a predetermined effect is generated on the changing icon. Then, if the display mode of the icon has changed after the effect disappears, the character performs an operation according to the success of the change in the display mode, and then disappears.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the icon has not changed after the effect disappears, the character performs an operation according to the failure of the change in the display mode and then disappears.

Next, a state in which the throwing kiss notice is executed after the hold icon that is the target of the throwing kiss notice is changed to a special mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the hold icon A21 in the normal mode is displayed in the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and the hold icon A20 in the normal mode is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. It is assumed that the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is performed when it is displayed.

Then, a game ball enters the first starting port 6, a new first special figure hold occurs, and a first start port winning designation command is issued to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. It is assumed that the throwing kiss notice is determined to be executed in the start opening winning process, and the throwing kiss notice is determined in scenario 93.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the hold icon A22 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. At the same time, the changing icon A20 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), when the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the hold icons A21 to A22 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A21 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A21 becomes the changing icon A21. Further, the display mode of the hold icon A22 changes to the second special mode 13 (red) with the shift to the first display unit 141a.

Then, a game ball enters the first starting port 6, a new first special figure hold occurs, and a first start port winning designation command is issued to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. It is assumed that the throwing kiss notice is not executed in the start opening winning process.

In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 96A, the hold icon A23 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed. At the same time, the changing icon A21 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96B, when the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the hold icons A22 to A23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively, to give a notice of throwing kiss. The character C3 appears and the changing icon change notice is started. Here, since the hold icon A22 shifts to the changing icon display area, the holding icon A22 changes to the changing icon A22, and the display mode changes from the second special mode 13 (red) to the second special mode with the shift. It changes to 14 (zebra pattern).

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. The icon to which the heart HT is skipped is determined by the normal icon display mode scenario indicated by the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and here, toward the changing icon A20. It is assumed that the heart HT is skipped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the heart HT hits the changing icon A20, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A20, and the changing icon A20 becomes difficult to see or invisible. (Not shown).

After that, when the predetermined effect is erased, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A22 changes from the second special mode 14 to the second special mode 15 (rainbow), and the “power” is displayed. A change notification image B for notifying that the display mode of the icon has changed is displayed in the vicinity of the changing icon A22, which is the target of the throwing kiss notice, and the voice output device 15 displays the changing icon. A voice notifying the change of the mode is output (for example, the voice of the character C3 is emitted as "power-up"), and the lighting effect device 16 performs the lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change. In the present embodiment, the change notification image HG is composed of an image including the text "power-up", but the display mode is not limited to this, and can be appropriately set.

Then, the character C3 performs an operation corresponding to the success of the change in the display mode (in FIG. 97 (b), an operation of spreading both hands with a smile), and then is erased as shown in FIG. 97 (c). ..

Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described using another specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the hold icons A30 and A31 in the normal mode (white) are displayed on the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b of the first hold icon display area 141. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the hold icons A30 and A31 displayed on the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. At the same time, when the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice appears. Since the hold icon A30 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A30 changes to the changing icon A30.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. Here, it is assumed that the heart HT is blown toward the changing icon A30.

Then, as shown in FIG. 99A, when the heart HT hits the changing icon A30, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A30, and the changing icon A30 becomes difficult to see or invisible. (Not shown).

After that, when the predetermined effect is erased, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A30 is changed to the second special mode 11 (white), and the voice output device 15 is concerned with the display mode. A voice notifying the change is output (for example, the voice of the character C3 is emitted as "power-up"), and the lighting effect device 16 performs the lighting effect in a manner dedicated to the change.

Then, the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change in the display mode, and then is erased as shown in FIG. 99 (c).

As described above, when the changing icon changes due to the throwing kiss notice, the change notification image B is displayed by the image display device 14, the occurrence of "power-up" by the voice output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16. Since it is notified that the changing icon has changed by the lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change, the player can easily recognize that the changing icon has changed.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the change notification image B, the character C3 is notified that the changing icon has changed by performing a successful operation according to the change of the changing icon. In this way, since it is notified that the changing icon has changed depending on the shape and the character, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the changing icon has changed.

In the present embodiment, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16 notify that the changing icon has changed, and the notification is a part of these various effect devices ( For example, it may be performed by any one or two of the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16.

Further, in FIGS. 95 to 99, a specific example in which the throwing kiss notice is given to the changing icon has been described, but similarly, the throwing kiss notice and the change in the display mode of the icon are also given to the hold icon. Notification is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is performed only when the shape of the icon does not change but the color of the icon changes, but the display mode also changes when the shape of the icon changes. It is also possible to notify the change of. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the icon display mode and suppress the deterioration of the effect due to the change in the icon display mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, "power-up 20%" is displayed in the change notification image B, but this "20%" portion is based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change. You can also make it selectable. Further, it is also possible to change the color and size of the change notification image B instead of the “20%” portion based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change.

Further, the notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be appropriately set. Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is performed for the change in the display mode of the icon performed through the action of the throwing kiss by the character C3. For example, it can be performed even for a sudden change in the display mode of the icon when the icon is shifted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is performed based on the preliminary judgment result, but the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, or the special figure change of the special figure judgment information that is the target of the throwing kiss notice. It is also possible to perform this based on the pattern determination result.

Further, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, but the execution timing of the throwing kiss notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the effect content of the variable effect. can do. Other execution timings of the throwing kiss notice include temporary stop or re-variation of the pseudo-ream, step-up of the so-called step-up notice, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or super reach. It can be appropriately set at the time of executing the development effect, when the reach state is established, the predetermined operation effect by the effect accessory device 17, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, one heart is blown toward one icon by one throwing kiss notice, and a notice is given as to whether or not the display mode changes once for one icon. However, with one throwing kiss notice, multiple hearts are blown toward one icon at the same time or at predetermined time intervals, and a notice of whether the display mode changes multiple times for one icon. May be done. In this case, it is also possible to notify the change of the icon display mode each time the icon display mode changes, and for one throwing kiss notice (after the last heart is skipped). ) It is also possible to collectively notify the change of the display mode of the icon once.

Further, one throwing kiss notice may cause a heart to be blown toward the plurality of icons to give a notice as to whether or not the display mode changes for the plurality of icons. In this case, it is possible to notify the change of the display mode of the icon to all the icons whose display mode has changed, and the display mode of the icon for some of the icons whose display mode has changed. It is also possible to notify the change of.

(Look-ahead zone production, zone fanning production and zone precursor production)
Next, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone fanning effect, and the zone precursor effect will be described. The look-ahead zone effect is a notice effect that suggests the expectation of winning a big hit over one or more variable effects, and the zone fanning effect is a notice effect that arouses whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed. It is performed using a special symbol in the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol. The zone precursor effect is a warning effect for suggesting or notifying the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone fanning effect, and the zone precursor effect are executed in the variable effect in the effect mode A, and the look-ahead notice (continuous) is performed based on the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command. It is a kind of notice production). First, the outline of the look-ahead zone effect, the zone fanning effect, and the zone precursor effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-1), when the zone fanning success effect is executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the variation display of the next effect symbol is started. The look-ahead zone production starts from. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-2), when the zone fanning failure effect is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (variable effect), the look-ahead zone starts from the start of the variable display of the next effect symbol. No production is performed.

Here, when the zone fanning success effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 87 (b-1), when the effect symbol is variablely displayed, it is first set as the left symbol in the left region of the display unit 140. The "look-ahead" symbol stops, and then the "zone" symbol stops as the right symbol in the right area of the display unit 140, suggesting the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and finally the middle symbol in the center area of the display unit 140. As the "rush" symbol stops. In this way, when all the preset special symbols (“look-ahead” symbol, “zone” symbol, and “stop” symbol) are stopped, it becomes “special symbol alignment” and the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Be notified.

On the other hand, when the zone fanning failure effect 1 is executed as the zone fanning failure effect, as shown in FIG. 87 (b-2), when the effect symbol is variablely displayed, the left symbol is first displayed as "". The "look-ahead" symbol stops, then the "zone" symbol as the right symbol stops, and finally the "rush" symbol as the middle symbol tries to stop, suggesting the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, but it does not stop. The normal effect symbol determined in the normal effect symbol stop display pattern determination in step S1309-3 is stopped as a middle symbol. In this way, when only a part of the preset special symbols is stopped, "special symbols are not aligned", and it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

When a special symbol appears as a zone fanning effect, the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that have been displayed up to that point may be displayed in a reduced state in the upper right portion of the display unit 140, for example. For example, if a special symbol appears while the normal effect symbol is variablely displayed, the reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are variablely displayed in the upper right portion of the display unit 140 with the appearance of the special symbol. Then, when the variation display is completed and the special symbol alignment or the special symbol alignment is performed, the same stop time as in the normal case (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) in the upper right portion of the display unit 140. The reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (effect symbols indicating loss) are stopped and displayed. Further, when the special symbol alignment or the special symbol irregularity is completed and a new variable display is started, the special symbol is erased and the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed while returning to the original size. It moves to the normal position in the unit 140, and the variation display of the effect symbol as usual is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 (c-1) and 87 (c-2), the size change of the changing icon performed with the zone fanning effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the size of the changing icon increases according to the stop of the special symbol performed as the zone fanning effect.

In the zone fanning success production, the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the "look-ahead" symbol, and the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the "zone" symbol, which is the second step. Then, the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the "rush" symbol, and it becomes the third step. When the zone fanning success effect is completed and the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the changing icon is maintained at the third stage size.

On the other hand, in the zone fanning failure effect 1, the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the "look-ahead" symbol, and the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the "zone" symbol. In the second stage, the size of the changing icon returns to the original normal size due to the slipping of the "rush" symbol.

In this way, by gradually increasing the size of the changing icon, which is easy for the player to pay attention to, it is possible to have a stronger expectation for the look-ahead zone effect.

Next, specific examples of the look-ahead zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone fanning effect will be described. Here, when the number of 1st special figure hold is "2", a game ball enters the 1st start opening 6, a new 1st special figure hold occurs, and the 1st special figure hold occurs. In response to this, the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start opening winning process, the look-ahead zone effect scenario No. “6” shown in FIG. 50 and the precursor effect scenario “14” shown in FIG. A specific example will be described when "-3" and the icon display mode scenario "8" shown in FIG. 53 are selected.

As shown in FIG. 100 (a), when the hold icons A40 to A42 of the normal mode are displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141b of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect indicating a loss is shown. When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), at the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved icon A40, the reserved icons A40 to A42 are changed to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, Along with shifting to the second display unit 141b, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon A40 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A40 changes to the changing icon A40.

Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is being executed, the game ball enters the first start opening 6, a new first special figure hold occurs, and the first special figure hold is performed. The first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of, and in the start opening winning process, the look-ahead zone effect scenario No. “6” shown in FIG. 50 and the precursor effect scenario “14” shown in FIG. -3 "is selected.

In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the hold icon A43 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the third special aspect 41, and is also shown in FIG. 100 (d). As described above, the hold icons A41 and A42 and the changing icon A40 corresponding to the advance hold for the newly generated first special figure hold change to the third special mode 41 (corresponding to the hold icon change notice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the variation display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 100 (b) is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol indicating the loss, as shown in FIG. 101 (b). The changing icon A40 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the reserved icon A41 is started, each of the reserved icons A41 to A43 is changed to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit. While shifting to 141a and the second display unit 141b, the display mode of the icon A43, which is the execution target of the look-ahead zone effect, changes to the third special mode 21 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2), and the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is not targeted. The display mode of the icons A41 and A42 is changed to the third special mode 51 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2). Since the hold icon A41 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A41 becomes the changing icon A41.

Here, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6, the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the hold icon related to the entry ( The zone effect non-target icon) A44 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the changing icon A41 is the effect symbol two before the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon A43 which is the zone effect target icon. Since it is a variable display, the zone fanning effect is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol.

Here, since the zone fanning effect is determined to be a zone fanning success effect, as shown in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c), the zone fanning effect includes a "look-ahead" symbol and a "zone" symbol. Then, the "rush" symbols are temporarily stopped in order, and it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Here, the size of the changing icon A42 gradually increases according to the stop of the "look-ahead" symbol, the stop of the "zone" symbol, and the stop of the "rush" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the variable display of the effect symbols started in FIG. 101 (c) is completely stopped and displayed with the special symbols aligned, the changing icon A41 is erased. To. In addition, it is also possible to sequentially stop and display the normal effect symbols in a state of being reduced to the position of the upper right portion of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 corresponding to the stop display of each of the three special symbols. It will be a combination of production patterns that will be lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A42 is started, the look-ahead zone background image HK indicating that the look-ahead zone is displayed is displayed, and the BGM and the illumination mode are displayed. The look-ahead zone effect (corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect) is started by switching from the effect mode A to the one dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect. That is, although the start time of the hold icon change notice and the continuous notice effect are different, the execution time is overlapped.

Further, each of the hold icons A42 to A44 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b. Here, since the hold icon A42 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A42 becomes the changing icon A42.

Further, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the look-ahead zone effect, is changed to the third special mode 31 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode), and the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44, which are not the execution target of the look-ahead zone effect. The display mode of is changed to the third special mode 61 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode). Further, the size of the changing icon A42 continues to be the size of the third stage.

Here, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6, the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the hold icon (zone) related to the entry. The effect non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same look-ahead zone effect notification mode 6.

Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), when the variable display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 103 (b) is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol indicating the loss, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon A42 of the third special aspect 31 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A43 related to the start opening winning designation command that generated the look-ahead zone effect is started, the hold icon is started. Each of A43 to A45 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, and the look-ahead zone effect continues. Since the hold icon A43 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A43 changes to the changing icon A43.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped and the reach state is established in the variation display of the effect symbol, the display mode of the changing icon A43 changes to the third special mode 33. Then, the color of the main silhouette part turns red, and the look-ahead zone production continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105A, when a predetermined super reach effect (for example, SP reach) is developed, the hold icons A44 and A45 displayed until immediately before that are hidden, and the changing icon A43 is hidden. The display mode of is changed to the third special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette portion becomes a zebra pattern, and the look-ahead zone effect ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), when the stop display of the effect symbols ("7" aligned) indicating the jackpot winning is performed, the silhouettes of the seven people related to the changing icon A43 are notified of the jackpot winning. Raise both hands to express joy.

As described above, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed, the zone precursor effect suggesting the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is set by changing the display mode of the icon to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode before the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Is done. Here, the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode has higher expectations for the execution of the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 (third special mode 1, third special mode 4) and the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1. A look-ahead zone effect suggestion aspect 2 (third special aspect 2, third special aspect 5) is provided. In the following, the zone precursor effect according to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 will be referred to as “zone precursor effect 1”, and the zone precursor effect according to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 will be referred to as “zone precursor effect 2”.

The look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone precursor effect 1, and the character "? Zone?" Is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people's silhouettes is composed of three people. Further, the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 is also an icon display mode dedicated to the zone precursor effect 2, and the character "△ zone △" is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people's silhouettes is composed of five people. There is. Therefore, the player sees the icons (holding icon and changing icon) displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2, and the zone suggesting that the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Since it is possible to easily recognize that the precursory effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

When the look-ahead zone is being executed, by changing the display mode of the icon to the look-ahead zone effect notification mode (third special aspect 3 and third special aspect 6), it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed. Zone notification effect is performed.

The look-ahead zone effect notification mode is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone notification effect, and the character "○ zone ○" is attached as the icon display mode, and the number of people's silhouettes is composed of seven people. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the zone notification effect is being executed by looking at the icons (holding icon and changing icon) displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect.

In addition, zone precursor effects 1 and 2 and zone notification effects are provided as effects indicating the pre-reading zone execution expectation, and the pre-reading zone execution expectations indicated by each effect are zone precursor effects 1 <zone precursor effects 2 <zones. It is a notification effect. Since the icon display mode related to the zone precursor effect 1, the icon display mode related to the zone precursor effect 2, and the icon display mode related to the zone notification effect are different from each other, the player can easily determine the pre-reading zone execution expectation. Can be recognized.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of look-ahead zone effect with different jackpot winning expectations. In this case, a first look-ahead zone effect and a second look-ahead zone effect, which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the first look-ahead zone effect, are provided, and the second look-ahead zone effect goes through the first look-ahead zone effect. It is also possible to make it execute from the first look-ahead zone effect in a developmental manner, or to execute it suddenly without going through the first look-ahead zone effect. Then, the type of the pre-reading zone effect to be executed can be suggested by the type of the zone precursor effect.

The icon according to the third special aspect is the same regardless of the type of the shape of the main silhouette portion, but the color of the main silhouette portion differs depending on the type, and the degree of expectation of winning a big hit differs depending on the color. In addition, the icon related to the third special aspect differs depending on the type of the number of people in the sub-silhouette part and the attached characters ("? Zone?", "△ zone △", "○ zone ○"). , The icon according to the third special aspect has a different pre-reading execution expectation depending on the number of people in the sub-silhouette part and the attached characters.

Therefore, if the player pays attention to the display mode of the icon when the look-ahead zone suggestion effect and the look-ahead zone notification effect are being executed, the player can recognize the jackpot winning expectation in addition to the look-ahead zone execution expectation. Therefore, the fun of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading execution expectation degree and the jackpot winning expectation degree are suggested by the elements constituting the third special aspects 1 to 6, but the suggested contents are not limited to this and are appropriately set. Can be done. For example, the degree of expectation that a specific effect such as SP reach, SPSP reach, or pseudo-ream is executed, or a specific type of jackpot such as a probabilistic jackpot or a long hit is executed by the elements constituting the third special aspects 1 to 6. It is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation to be given.

Further, the pre-reading execution expectation degree and the jackpot winning expectation degree are suggested or notified by the display mode of the icon, but these suggestions or notifications are not the display mode of the icon, but are, for example, the display mode of the effect symbol or the effect for effect. It can also be performed by other specific production modes such as the operation mode of the movable portion 17A of the device 17. Further, although the zone precursor effect is performed by the icon, it can also be performed by another image such as a background image or an effect pattern displayed on the display unit 140. Further, the zone precursor effect can be performed by using other effect devices such as the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, and the effect accessory device 17 instead of the image display device 14.

Further, the number of suggested contents is not limited to the embodiment and can be appropriately set depending on the elements constituting the icon display mode. Further, as an element constituting the icon display mode suggesting a predetermined item, the shape, size, operation mode, etc. of the icon can be appropriately set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone notification effect are performed based on the preliminary determination result, but the special figure determination information that is the target of the look-ahead zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone notification effect. It is also possible to perform this based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, or the special symbol variation pattern determination result.

Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the zone precursor effect and the zone notification effect are executed at the time of winning or the hold shift. Not limited to this, it can be appropriately set according to the effect content of the variable effect. Other execution timings of these effects include, for example, temporary stop or re-variation in a pseudo-ream, step-up of so-called step-up notice, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or development into super reach. It can be appropriately set at the time of executing the development effect, when the reach state is established, or at a predetermined operation effect by the effect device device 17.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead zone effect is started, the zone fanning success effect is always executed before the start, but the effect symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) without going through the zone fanning success effect. The look-ahead zone effect may be suddenly executed at the start or in the middle of (including the re-variation display in the effect).

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when a gaming ball enters a starting port while a special symbol variation display is being performed, determination information is obtained. It is stored as hold data, and based on the stored hold data, the judgment result of the special symbol determination performed based on the hold data is "execute a special game" before the special symbol judgment based on the hold data is performed. If the judgment result of the pre-judgment is "execute a special game", the effect mode is changed from the normal normal effect mode to the stop display of a specific special symbol. Is set to a specific effect mode in which the expectation that is performed is higher than the normal effect mode, but there is a problem that the player may not notice that it may be set to the specific effect mode. was there.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine Y of the present embodiment, after the game medium (game ball or the like) has passed through the start area (first start port 6 or second start port 7). , Based on the fact that the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is performed on the predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified. When the stop display of the symbol of is performed, it is a gaming machine that executes a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and the determination information (special symbol determination information) is based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area. ), And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the determination information acquisition means for acquiring the game medium and the variation display of the symbol whose start condition for the variation display of the symbol has not yet been satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area. To the limit, the hold storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means as the hold storage, and the hold storage stored in the hold storage means when the start condition for the variable display of the symbol is satisfied. Based on the above, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and an effect control means for executing a notification effect (variable effect) for notifying the determination result when the determination by the determination means is performed. As the effect mode of the notification effect by the effect control means, it is possible to set a specific effect mode (look-ahead zone effect) in which the expectation of executing the special game is higher than that of the normal effect mode (for example, effect mode A). When the specific effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means and the effect mode setting means, a precursor effect (zone precursor effect) suggesting the setting of the specific effect mode before being set to the specific effect mode. The precursor effect execution means for executing the precursor effect and the precursor effect execution notification (displaying an icon according to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) indicating that the precursor effect is being executed when the precursor effect is executed. It is equipped with an execution notification means.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the precursory effect is being executed, and it is possible to easily notice that the specific effect mode may be set.

Further, in the conventional game machine (for example, the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when the game ball enters the starting port when the special symbol is variablely displayed, the determination information is displayed. It is stored as hold data, and based on the stored hold data, the judgment result of the special symbol determination performed based on the hold data is "execute a special game" before the special symbol judgment based on the hold data is performed. If the judgment result of the pre-judgment is "execute a special game", the effect mode is changed from the normal normal effect mode to the stop display of a specific special symbol. Is set to a specific effect mode in which the degree of expectation that is performed is higher than that of the normal effect mode, but there is a problem that the player cannot recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode. ..

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine Y of the present embodiment, after the game medium (game ball or the like) has passed through the start area (first start port 6 or second start port 7). , Based on the fact that the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is performed on the predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified. When the stop display of the symbol of is performed, it is a gaming machine that executes a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and the determination information (special symbol determination information) is based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area. ), And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the variable display of the symbol whose game medium has passed through the starting region but the start condition of the variable display of the symbol has not yet been satisfied. To the limit, the hold storage means that stores the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means as the hold storage, and the hold storage stored in the hold storage means when the start condition of the variable display of the symbol is satisfied. Based on the above, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and an effect control means for executing a notification effect (variation effect) for notifying the determination result when the determination by the determination means is performed. As the effect mode of the notification effect by the effect control means, it is possible to set a specific effect mode (look-ahead zone effect) in which the expectation of executing the special game is higher than that of the normal effect mode (for example, effect mode A). When the specific effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means and the effect mode setting means, a precursor effect (zone precursor effect) suggesting the setting of the specific effect mode before being set to the specific effect mode. The precursor effect execution means for executing the precursor effect, and the precursor effect execution notification (displaying an icon according to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) indicating that the precursor effect is being executed when the precursor effect is executed. It is provided with an execution notification means, and there are a plurality of types of notification modes of the precursor effect execution notification. In the notification modes of the plurality of types of precursor effect execution notification, the expectation degree at which the specific effect mode is set is the first expectation degree. It is shown that the first precursor effect execution notification mode (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1) and the second expectation degree in which the specific effect mode is set are higher than the first expectation degree. The second precursor effect execution notification mode (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2) is included.

By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when a gaming ball enters a starting port while a special symbol variation display is being performed, determination information is displayed. When the data is stored as hold data and the hold data is stored, the hold image corresponding to the hold data is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device. Further, based on the stored reserved data, the determination result of the special symbol determination performed based on the reserved data is "execute the special game" before the special symbol determination based on the reserved data is performed. It is expected that the special game will be executed by making a judgment (preliminary judgment) and changing the display mode of the reserved image to a special display mode different from the usual one based on the judgment result of the preliminary judgment. Although the degree was suggested or notified, the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed based on the judgment result of the preliminary judgment for the fluctuation effect performed in response to the variation display of the special symbol is higher than that in the normal effect mode. It may be set to a high specific effect mode, but the expectation level set to the specific effect mode is not suggested or notified by the effect mode of the specific effect indicating the expectation level that the special game such as the display of the reserved image is executed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode depending on the effect mode of the specific effect.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine Y of the present embodiment, after the game medium (game ball or the like) has passed through the start area (first start port 6 or second start port 7). , Based on the fact that the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is performed on the predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified. When the stop display of the symbol of is performed, it is a gaming machine that executes a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and the determination information (special symbol determination information) is based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area. ), And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the determination information acquisition means for acquiring the game medium and the variation display of the symbol whose start condition for the variation display of the symbol has not yet been satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area. To the limit, the hold storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means as the hold storage, and the hold storage stored in the hold storage means when the start condition for the variable display of the symbol is satisfied. Based on the above, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game, and an effect control means for executing a notification effect (variable effect) for notifying the determination result when the determination by the determination means is performed. As the effect mode of the notification effect by the effect control means, it is possible to set a specific effect mode (look-ahead zone effect) in which the expectation of executing the special game is higher than that of the normal effect mode (for example, effect mode A). The specific effect mode setting means and the specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect (display of an icon) indicating a predetermined predetermined item are provided, and the specific effect indicates the degree of expectation for executing the special game. It has a first specific effect and a second specific effect indicating the degree of expectation that the specific effect mode is set.

By doing so, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode depending on the effect mode of the specific effect.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-195682), a variation display of a special symbol is performed based on a determination result of whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. When the result of this variable display becomes a predetermined special result, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In such a gaming machine, the interest of the game is enhanced by performing a variable effect in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed according to any of a plurality of types of variable patterns by an image display means so as to correspond to the variable display of the special symbol. There is something. However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the variable effect and the game is not interesting.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determination means. It is provided with a variable display means for executing a variable display of a (special) symbol that notifies the determination result of the above, and when the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special result (big hit special symbol), it is advantageous for the player. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, the effect control means (effect control board 102, lamp control board 104, image control board 105, etc.) for executing the variation effect for producing the variation display is provided, and the effect of the variation effect is produced. The embodiment (variable effect pattern) includes a non-specific effect mode in which the specific effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) expected to have the special result is not executed, and a specific effect mode in which the specific effect is executed. In the specific effect mode, a transition effect period (transition effect) in which a transition effect is performed from the predictive effect period (execution period of the look-ahead zone effect or story effect) for predicting the special result to the specific effect. The first specific effect mode (variable effect patterns A013, A038, A058, etc.) for executing the specific effect after the normal reach execution period) and the transition effect period from the predictive effect period to the return to the predictive effect period. Then, there is a second specific effect mode (variable effect patterns A014, A039, A059, etc.) in which the specific effect is executed after the transition effect period, and the effect control means is used in the determination result of the determination means. Accordingly, the variable effect is executed according to any of the effect modes. Further, the expectation that the special game is executed is higher in the case where the variable effect is executed by the second specific effect mode than in the case where the variable effect is executed by the first specific effect mode. I have to.

By doing so, it is possible to surprise the player with a novel and variable production mode that has never existed before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-158590), a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. It is generally provided with a variable display means for displaying the symbol to be notified in a variable manner at any of a plurality of variable times, and when the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special result, a special game advantageous to the player is executed. Is. In such a gaming machine, either a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, high-probability gaming state, etc.) in which a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol than in the normal gaming state. It is possible to control the crab, and during the variable display of the symbol, the image display device may execute the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol (decorative symbol). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that even if there is a change in the gaming state, there is no change in the effect pattern displayed on the image display device, and the game is not interesting.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determination means. A variation display means for displaying a variation of a (special) symbol at any of a plurality of variation times based on the determination result of the above is provided, and when the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special result (big hit special symbol), In a gaming machine capable of executing the special game, control is performed between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is possible to display the effect symbol on the game state control means and the display means (image display device 14), and to execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol while the variation display is being executed. An execution means is provided, and the display mode of the effect symbol is less decorative than the first display mode (first effect symbol) and the first display mode (simple design, less color, dark color). (Etc.) There is a second display mode (second effect symbol or third effect symbol), and during the normal gaming state, the basic of the effect symbol (during waiting for customers, during variable effect below normal reach, SP reach or higher). The display mode (before the transition effect of the variable effect) is the first display mode, and the basic display mode of the effect symbol (during the waiting for customers or during all the variable effects) is displayed in the second display mode during the specific gaming state. It is designed to be an embodiment. Further, the gaming state control means is configured to return to the normal gaming state based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times after controlling to the specific gaming state, and the variation effect executing means is described. When returning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, the effect symbol displayed in the second display mode is switched to the first display mode with the execution of the predetermined effect.

By doing so, it is possible to change the effect symbol displayed on the image display device when there is a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-061360), the determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player and the determination result of the determination means are used. It is provided with a display effect executing means for performing a corresponding display effect on the image display device, and it is possible to control either the first game state or the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Some are common. In such a gaming machine, a detection means capable of detecting an input from a player is provided, and a promotion image prompting the input is displayed on an image display device when a valid period occurs during the execution of the effect, and the valid period occurs. When an input is detected, there is an operation effect that suggests a determination result of the determination means. However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the promotion image displayed on the image display device does not change even when the gaming state is changed, and the game is not interesting.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determination means. In a gaming machine provided with a variable effect executing means for performing a variable effect according to the determination result of the above by the display means (image display device 14), the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and the first gaming state are higher than those of the first gaming state. A game state control means that can be controlled to a second game state (high probability game state, low probability time-short game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a detection means that can detect an input from the player (a detection means that can detect an input from the player). (Effect button device 18, infrared sensor, touch panel, etc.), and a promotion display means for displaying a promotion image prompting input to the detection means on the display means based on the occurrence of an effective period during the variation effect. The promotion image includes an operation effect executing means capable of executing an operation effect suggesting a determination result of the determination means based on the detection of the input by the detection means during the valid period. , There are a first promotion image (promotion image 1A / 1B) and a second promotion image (promotion image 2A / 2B, promotion image 3A / 3B) different from the first promotion image, and the promotion display means is the first promotion image. The first promotion image is displayed in the variation effect during one gaming state, and the second promotion image is displayed in the variation effect during the second gaming state.

By doing so, it is possible to change the promotion image displayed on the image display device when there is a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-073377), the determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player and the determination result of the determination means are used. Generally, it is provided with a variable effect executing means for performing a variable effect according to the image display device. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control either a first gaming state or a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the display device displays game information related to the game. There is something to display. However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the display mode of the gaming information displayed on the image display device does not change even when the gaming state is changed, and the game is not interesting. there were.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determination means. In a gaming machine provided with a variable effect executing means for performing a variable effect according to a determination result of the above by a display means (image display device 14), a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state, A game state control means that can be controlled to either a high-probability game state, a low-probability time-saving game state, or a jackpot game, and predetermined game information related to the game (number of consecutive villas information, high-probability remaining number of times information, time reduction). The display means is provided with a game information display means capable of displaying (remaining number of times information, launch operation information, etc.), and the plurality of types of game states include a first game state (low probability short game state, etc.). And a second gaming state (high probability gaming state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the variation effect executing means is in the first gaming state and in the second gaming state. The effect mode (variation effect pattern, etc.) of the variation effect is changed, and the game information display means makes the display mode of the predetermined game information different between the first game state and the second game state. I am doing it.

By doing so, it is possible to change the display mode of the predetermined game information displayed on the image display device when the game state is changed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the second embodiment, the part related to the setting of the effect mode is different in relation to the first embodiment. Therefore, the same parts as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts related to the setting of the effect mode will be mainly described.

(Production mode judgment table)
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode determination table referred to when the effect mode is set. As shown in FIG. 106, the effect mode determination table is associated with the game state, the high probability remaining number, the time saving remaining number, the effect mode before the transition, the effect mode after the transition, and the effect mode flag. ing. Further, as a reference, the number of stay fluctuations (number of fluctuation effects) in the set effect mode is described.

In the normal game state, four types of effect modes (effect modes A0 to A3) are set, and in the probabilistic game state, one type of effect mode (effect mode B1) is set. In the low-accuracy time-shortening game state, two types of effect modes (effect modes B1 to B2) are set.

The effect mode A0 is a special effect mode that is set only when the game state is changed from the low probability time-short game state (effect mode B2) to the normal game state, and when the variable effect is executed 10 times, the effect mode is set. It has come to move to A1.

The effect mode A1 is an effect mode set after the effect mode A0 or the effect mode A3, stays until at least 15 variable effects are executed, and then the transition condition of the effect mode (transition of the effect mode). When the lottery is won and the loss SP reach effect or the execution of the loss SP SP reach effect) is established, the mode shifts to the effect mode A2.

The effect mode A2 is an effect mode set after the effect mode A1, and stays until at least 15 variable effects are executed. After that, when the above-mentioned transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied, the effect mode A3 It is designed to move to.

The effect mode A3 is an effect mode set after the effect mode A2, and stays until at least 15 variable effects are executed. After that, when the above-mentioned transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied, the effect mode A1 It is designed to move to.

The effect mode B1 is an effect mode that is set in the probabilistic game state and the low probability time-shortening game state. It is designed to move to.

The effect mode B2 is an effect mode set after the effect mode B1. After staying until the number of remaining time reductions reaches 0, when the normal game state is entered, the effect mode A0 is set. There is.

When the power is turned on to the gaming machine Y, the effect mode A1 is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine Y, and when the power is turned on to the gaming machine Y, the probabilistic gaming state is set. , The effect mode B1 is set, and when the power is turned on to the gaming machine Y, the effect mode B1 is set if the number of remaining time reductions is 6 or more. If the number of remaining time reductions is 5 or less, the effect mode B2 is set.

Here, as the first feature of the effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 106, a plurality of effect modes can be set in the normal game state, and more effect modes than in the probabilistic game state and the low probability time-short game state. The points that have been set can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored in the normal game state where the stay period tends to be long, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the second feature of the effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 106 is that the effect mode does not change even when the probabilistic game state is changed to the low probability time-short game state. By doing so, even when the probabilistic game state is changed to the low probable time-shortening game state, the player's feeling of loss can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as a third feature of the effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 106, there is a point that a dedicated effect mode (effect mode A0) is set when the low probability time-shortening gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. .. By doing so, the player can be motivated to continue the game even if the normal gaming state is entered, and the operation of the gaming machine Y can be improved.

(Display example of image display device)
Next, a display example of the image display device 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 is a display example of the image display device 14 for each effect mode in the normal game state, and FIG. 108 shows the image display device 14 for each effect mode in the specific game state (probability variation game state, low probability time-short game state). This is a display example.

As shown in FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (d), in the customer waiting state in the normal gaming state, one of the effect modes A0 to A3 is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The effect mode image MD to be shown is displayed, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center of the display unit 140, and three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side on the lower left side of the display unit 140. ..

The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are a vertically long rectangular symbol-based image ZBG, a character image CYG showing any of nine types of characters, and any one of 1 to 9 corresponding to nine types of characters on a one-to-one basis. It is a composite image in which an identification image SG showing a number is superimposed, and a display mode is set for each effect mode.

In the effect mode A1, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the first display mode having a predetermined decorativeness, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same size. It has become. The effect symbols "1", "3", and "5" displayed here are the initial effect symbols displayed when the game state immediately after the power is turned on is the normal game state (effect mode A).

In the effect mode A2, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the second display mode having a decorativeness different from the first display mode, and are displayed on the left and right effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3. Compared to this, the central effect symbol TZ2 is displayed in a smaller size.

In the effect mode A3, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the third display mode having decorativeness different from the first and second display modes, and the left and right effect symbols TZ1 are displayed. The central effect symbol TZ2 is displayed in a larger size than the TZ3.

In the effect mode A0, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same first display mode as in the first effect mode, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same size. It has become.

That is, the first display mode to the third display mode, which are the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal gaming state, are set so that the decorativeness is different from each other, and the first display mode <third display mode <first display mode. 2 The decorativeness (design, color, size, etc.) increases in the order of display modes.

The level of decorativeness in the first display mode to the third display mode is not limited to the above-mentioned order, and may be set so that the decorativeness of the first display mode is the highest, for example. By doing so, the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 immediately after the power is turned on (in the case of a normal gaming state) becomes gorgeous, and it is possible to give a good impression to the gaming machine Y.

Further, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the first to third display modes may be stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data, but the symbol base image ZBG, the character image CYG, and the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb. It may be stored in the image display device 14 and combined when it is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, the base image and the numerical image constituting the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb and combined when displayed on the image display device 14.

As shown in FIG. 108, in the specific gaming state (probability variation gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state), the effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode B1 or B2 is on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Is displayed, and the number of consecutive villas image OKG, which is the number of jackpot games executed while the specific game state is continuously executed, is displayed near the upper center of the display unit, and on the upper right side of the display unit, A right-handed image MU that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 2A is displayed, and the remaining number of times image NK showing the remaining number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state is displayed on the lower left side of the display unit. Is displayed, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center of the display unit 140, and three special effect symbols are displayed side by side on the lower left side of the display unit 140.

The right-handed image MU is a composite image in which the right-handed information indicating right-handedness and the decorative image for decorating the right-handed information are combined. Regardless of whether it is the effect mode B1 or the effect mode B2, a display mode common to the specific gaming state is set.

The remaining number image NK is a composite image that combines the remaining number information indicating the remaining number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state and the decorative image that decorates the remaining number information, and is it in the probabilistic game state? A display mode common to the specific gaming state is set regardless of whether the game is in the low-probability time-shortening gaming state and in the effect mode B1 or the effect mode B2.

The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are single images of only the identification image (identifier) indicating any number from 1 to 9, and are in the probabilistic game state or the low probability time-short game state, and the effect. Regardless of whether the mode is B1 or the effect mode B2, a display mode common to the specific gaming state is set.

In the effect mode B1, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the fourth display mode in which the decorativeness (design, color, size, etc.) is lower than that in the first to third display modes. , The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same size.

In the effect mode B2, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same fourth display mode as the effect mode B1, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same size. It has become. That is, in the effect mode B1 and the effect mode B2, the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 do not change.

The fourth display mode may be a composite image in which the above-mentioned pattern-based image and / or character image are combined, but even in that case, the display mode is less decorative than the first to third display modes. It is good to set.

Here, in the effect symbols "1", "3", and "5" displayed in FIGS. 108 (a) and 108 (b), the game state immediately after the power is turned on is the specific game state (effect modes B1 to B2). It is an initial effect symbol displayed in a certain case, and the game state immediately after the power is turned on is the same (common) identification information as in the case of the normal game state (effect mode A1).

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the special effect symbol TZ4 is a composite image in which a hexagonal base image and a numerical image (identifier) of any one of 1 to 9 are superimposed, and is in a gaming state. In addition, a common display mode is set regardless of the effect mode.

The special effect design TZ4 is less decorative than the first to third display modes (simple design, less color, etc.) and more decorative than the fourth display mode (complex design, more colors, etc.). ) It is displayed in the fifth display mode, and three special effect symbols are displayed in the same size.

Although the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the specific game state are set in the fourth display mode and the display mode of the special effect symbols TZ4 is set in the fifth display mode, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the specific game state are special. The fifth display mode may be set to the same as the effect symbol TZ4, or the special effect symbol TZ4 may be set to the fourth display mode.

Further, the special effect symbol ZT4 is stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data, but since it has the same shape (form) as the identification image SG in the effect symbols of the first to third display modes, the identification image is the identification image. When the SG is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the same image data may be used and displayed on the image display device 14. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being compressed.

Further, the special effect symbol TZ4 is not displayed on the image display device 14 (variation display and stop display), but is displayed (variation display and stop display) on a dedicated display unit (LED display, etc.). Alternatively, the special effect symbols TZ4 may be eliminated and only the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be used.

(Type of production pattern)
Here, the types of effect symbols that are stopped and displayed during the variable effect in each game state (normal game state, specific game state) will be described.

In the normal game state (effect modes A0 to A3), 12 types of effect symbols are set to be stopped and displayed (including temporary stop) during the variable effect, and 9 types indicating any number from 1 to 9 are set. In addition to the normal effect symbol of, there are two types of change symbols that suggest (notify) the occurrence of an icon change notice by being stopped and displayed (the first indicating that the icon changes to a display mode with a high degree of expectation). There is a change symbol (second change symbol) that indicates that the display mode has a high two-step expectation, and one type of pseudo-continuous symbol that suggests (notifies) the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect by temporarily stopping.

In the specific game state (effect modes B1 to B2), the number of effect symbols displayed (including temporary stop) during the variable effect is set to 9 types, which are less than those in the normal game state, and any of 1 to 9. There are only 9 types of normal production symbols that show the numbers.

In this way, in the normal game state, the effect symbol that is not stopped and displayed in the specific game state is stopped and displayed, so that the effect of the effect in the normal game state where the stay period tends to be longer than that in the specific game state can be improved. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the specific game state where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal game state, the effect symbols (changed symbols, pseudo-continuous symbols) different from the normal effect symbols are not stopped and displayed, so that the player feels annoyed. It is possible to avoid various inconveniences and improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the display mode of the changed symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the display mode (any of the first to third display modes) corresponding to each effect mode in the normal gaming state. It may be a common display mode regardless of the mode. By doing so, even if the effect mode is changed, it becomes easy to grasp that it is a changed symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the change symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are stopped and displayed as the middle symbol in the central region of the display unit 140, but are stopped and displayed as the left symbol in the left region and the right symbol in the right region. May be good. By doing so, the timing at which the changed symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed becomes various, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the change symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect mode of the effect modes A0 to A3, but may not be temporarily stopped and displayed in the other effect modes. For example, although the temporary stop is displayed in the effect modes A1 to A3, the temporary stop may not be displayed in the effect mode A0.

(Display example of variable effect in effect mode A1)
Next, a display example of the variable effect in the effect mode A1 will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

First, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the image display device 14 displays an effect image of the effect mode A1 such as an effect mode image MD and a background image indicating that the effect mode A1 is set. Then, the effect symbols "4", "2", and "1" in the first display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "4", "2", and "1" are stopped and displayed. In addition, one first hold icon in the normal mode is displayed.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the first hold icon shifts and changes to the changing icon, and the effect symbols TZ1 to the first display mode are changed. The TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode start the variable display, and the variable effect (first variable effect) is executed. Immediately after, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7, the number of the second special figure hold becomes "1" and one second hold icon is displayed.

After that, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), the effect symbols "1", "2", and "4" of the first display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "1", "2", and "4" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect (first variation effect) ends.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), the second hold icon shifts and changes to the changing icon, and the effect symbols TZ1 to the first display mode are displayed. The TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode start the variable display, and the variable effect (second variable effect) is executed.

After that, when a predetermined period elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 109 (e), the effect symbols "1", "4", and "2" of the first display mode are stopped and displayed. The variable effect (second variable effect) ends.

As described above, in the effect mode A1, regardless of whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 having the same display mode (first display mode) are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to perform a unified production in one production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect mode A1, the same regardless of whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. The special effect symbol TZ4 of the display mode (fifth display mode) will be displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to perform a unified production in one production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are the same even in other effect modes (effect mode A2, effect mode A3, effect mode A0, effect mode B1, effect mode B2), and the first special symbol changes. Regardless of whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the display or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 having the same display mode corresponding to the effect mode at that time. Will be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the display mode of the special effect symbol TZ4 is the same even in other effect modes (effect mode A2, effect mode A3, effect mode A0, effect mode B1, effect mode B2), and the variable display of the first special effect symbol is displayed. Regardless of whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the special effect symbol TZ4 having the same display mode (fifth display mode) is variable display. Will be done.

(Display example when the production mode changes during the normal game state)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111, a display example when the effect mode changes during the normal gaming state will be described.

First, a case where the effect mode shifts from the effect mode A1 to the effect mode A2 will be described with reference to FIG. 110.

First, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), during the variable display of the first special symbol, the image display device 14 has the effect mode A1 such as the effect mode image MD and the background image indicating that the effect mode A1 is set. The effect image is displayed, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the first display mode and the special effect symbols TZ4 in the fifth display mode are variablely displayed and the variable effect (first variable effect) is executed.

Next, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the effect symbols "4", "2", and "1" of the first display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "4", "2", and "1" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, the changing icon is erased, and the variation effect (first variation effect) ends. At this time, it is assumed that the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the first hold icon shifts and changes to the changing icon, and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode is started. Starts the variable display and the variable effect (first variable effect) is started.

Immediately after that, as shown in FIGS. 110 (d) and 110 (e), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the attention of the player). .. Specifically, the blackout effect is displayed on the display unit 140 so that the visual recognition of the effect image (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, etc.) of the effect mode A1 is restricted, and the effect is darkened (blackout). ). Then, after displaying the closing of the sliding door image behind the special effect symbol TZ4, the display of opening the sliding door image is performed. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

Then, when the sliding door image is completely opened and the transition effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 110 (f) and 110 (g), the effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode A2 is set, the effect mode such as the background image, etc. The effect image of A2 is displayed, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the second display mode switched from the first display mode start variable display.

After that, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 110 (h), the effect symbols "5", "2", and "7" of the second display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "5", "2", and "7" are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect (first variation effect) ends.

Next, a case where the effect mode shifts from the effect mode A2 to the effect mode A3 will be described with reference to FIG. 111.

First, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the image display device 14 displays the effect image of the effect mode A2 such as the effect mode image MD and the background image indicating that the effect mode A2 is set. The effect symbols "5", "2", and "7" in the display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "5", "2", and "7" are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (first variable effect) ends. At this time, the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the second hold icon shifts and changes to the changing icon, and the effect symbols TZ1 to the second display mode are changed. The TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode start the variable display, and the variable effect (second variable effect) is executed.

Immediately after that, as shown in FIGS. 111 (c) and 111 (d), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the attention of the player). .. Specifically, the darkening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 and darkened (blacked out) so that the visual recognition of the effect image (effect mode image, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image) of the effect mode A2 is restricted. .. Then, after displaying the closing of the sliding door image behind the special effect symbol TZ4, the display of opening the sliding door image is performed. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

Then, when the sliding door image is completely opened and the transition effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 111 (e) and 111 (f), the effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode is A3, the effect of the third display mode. The effect images of the effect mode A3 such as the symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the background image are displayed, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the third display mode switched from the second display mode start the variable display.

After that, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 111 (g), the effect symbols "4", "7", and "2" of the third display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "4", "7", and "2" are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect (second variation effect) ends.

It should be noted that even in the case of shifting from the effect mode A3 to the effect mode A1 and the transition from the effect mode A0 to the effect mode A1, the above-mentioned transition effect is performed and the effect of the effect mode after the transition to the image display device 14 is performed. The image is displayed, and the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched.

In this way, regardless of whether the variable display of the special symbol held before the transition of the effect mode is the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol, after the transition of the effect mode When executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode corresponding to the effect mode are displayed in a variable manner in the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol. Therefore, it is possible to separate the display mode of the effect symbol for each effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the effect mode shifts in the normal gaming state, the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the player's attention) to display the effect symbol. Since the switching is performed, the player's attention can be attracted to the transition effect, and it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and discomfort that the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are switched during the progress of the game.

Further, since the transition effect executed when the effect mode shifts in the normal gaming state has the same effect mode regardless of the effect mode before the transition and the effect mode after the transition, the effect mode shifts. It becomes easier for the player to detect this, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that a part of the transition effect may be different depending on the type of the effect mode before the transition and the effect mode after the transition to have a similar effect mode.

As a transition effect (predetermined effect), the display unit 140 is blacked out to close and open the fusuma image, but only the display unit 140 is darkened without closing and opening the fusuma image. It may be done, or only the sliding door image may be closed and opened without darkening the display unit 140. Further, instead of darkening the display unit 140, a whitening effect (brightening effect) may be displayed on the display unit 140 to cause whitening (whiteout: brightening).

Further, while the transition effect is being executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the display unit 140, but may not be displayed on the display unit 140.

When a sub image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 14, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the sub image display device during the execution of the transition effect, and the image is displayed after the transition effect is completed. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed on the display device 14.

Further, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed during the execution of the transition effect may be a display mode corresponding to the effect mode before the transition, or may be a display mode corresponding to the effect mode after the transition, or may be specified. It may be the 4th display mode corresponding to the gaming state, or it may be the same 5th display mode as the special effect symbol TZ4.

In addition, since the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied at the end of the variable effect, the transition effect is executed at the start of the first variable effect after the transition condition is satisfied, but the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied. The transition effect may be executed at the end of the variable effect.

Further, although the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is not operated during the execution of the transition effect, a predetermined operation is performed on the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 during the execution of the transition effect. You may let it. By doing so, it becomes easy to attract the attention of the player, and it is possible to effectively reduce the unnaturalness and discomfort that the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are switched during the progress of the game.

(Display example of variable effect in normal game state)
Next, a display example of a variable effect in which a specific effect (SP reach effect) is executed in a normal gaming state (effect mode A1) will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

First, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), during the variable display of the first special symbol, the image display device 14 displays the changing icon in the special mode (green), and the first display mode. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode are variablely displayed and the variable effect (first variable effect) is executed.

Next, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), the effect symbol "1" in the first display mode temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3 to form a reach state, and the normal reach is formed. Is executed. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 continues the variable display without temporarily stopping.

After that, when developing into the SP reach effect (specific effect), the development effect (predetermined effect) for developing the SP reach effect (attracting the attention of the player) is executed. The development effect includes a first development effect and a second development effect. When the jackpot game is not executed, the first development effect is easily executed (execution ratio is high), and the jackpot game is executed. In that case, the second development effect is easy to be executed (execution rate is high). That is, the second development production has a higher expectation of big hit than the first development production.

When the first development effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 112 (c-1), the effect image of the effect mode A1 (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, etc.) can be visually recognized. A whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 so as to be regulated, and whitening is performed. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed on the front side of the whitening effect.

When the second development effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 112 (c-2), the visual recognition of the effect image (effect mode image, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, etc.) of the effect mode A1 is restricted. The darkening effect and the lightning effect are displayed on the display unit 140, and the movable portion 17A of the effect device 17 is moved to the position where the lightning effect starts to emit light. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed on the front side of the darkening effect.

After that, when the development effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), the effect image EG and the background image in which the ally character and the enemy character battle each other are displayed, and the SP reach effect (specific effect) is started. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the fourth display mode switched from the display mode are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen while forming the reach state.

Then, when the result of the variation effect is "loss", as shown in FIG. 113A, the image display device 14 displays the character information of "YOU LOSE" notifying that the variation effect is lost. At the same time, the effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" of the fourth display mode, which is a combination of loss, are temporarily stopped.

After that, when the SP reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 113B, the image display device 14 has a return effect (predetermined effect) for returning from the SP reach effect (specific effect) (attracting the player's attention). ) Is executed. Specifically, the whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 and whitened out so that the visual recognition of the effect images (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background images, etc.) of the SP reach effect is restricted.

Then, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), the effect image of the effect mode A1 such as the effect mode image MD and the background image is displayed (visualization is permitted), and the fourth display mode is switched to. The effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the 1 display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed to change the effect (first variation). Production) ends.

On the other hand, when the result of the variation effect is a "big hit", as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the image display device 14 displays the character information of "YOU WIN" notifying that it is a big hit. At the same time, the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" of the fourth display mode, which is a combination of big hits, are temporarily stopped.

After that, when the re-lottery effect is started, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the temporarily stopped effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 re-change while maintaining the jackpot combination, and when the re-variation period elapses, As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fourth display mode, which are a combination of jackpots, are temporarily stopped.

Then, when the re-lottery effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 113 (d), the image display device 14 has a return effect (predetermined effect) for returning from the re-lottery effect (specific effect) (attracting the attention of the player). ) Is executed. Specifically, the whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 and whitened out so that the visual recognition of the effect images (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background images, etc.) of the re-lottery effect is restricted.

After that, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the effect image of the effect mode A1 such as the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the background image is displayed (visualization is permitted), and the fourth effect is displayed. The effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" of the first display mode switched from the display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" of the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed. The variable effect (first variable effect) is completed, and the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed.

If the re-lottery effect is not executed, the process shifts from FIG. 114 (a) to FIG. 114 (d), and the return effect is an effect for returning from the SP reach effect.

In this way, when a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is started in the variable effect during the normal gaming state, the image display device 14 develops the specific effect (attracts the player's attention). Since the development effect (predetermined effect) is executed to switch the display mode of the effect symbol, the player's attention can be drawn to the development effect, and the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the variable effect. Can be reduced.

In addition, when the specific effect (re-lottery effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) ends in the variable effect during the normal gaming state, the image display device 14 returns from the specific effect (attracts the player's attention). Since the display mode of the effect symbol is switched by executing the return effect (predetermined effect) of, the player's attention can be drawn to the transition effect, and the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the variable effect. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, since there are multiple types of development effects for shifting to a specific effect, and the expectation of each jackpot is set to be different, the player's expectation of which development effect will be executed is improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since one of the development effects for shifting to the specific effect and the return effect for returning from the specific effect have the same effect mode, it is possible to clearly grasp the start and end of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are not displayed on the display unit 140 during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, they may be displayed on the display unit 140. In that case, it is advisable to reduce the display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 toward the edge of the screen (for example, upper left or upper right) in a state of superimposing the whitening effect or the blackening effect.

Further, when a sub image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 14, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the sub image display device during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, and the development effect and the development effect are performed. After the return effect is completed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed on the image display device 14.

Further, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, the display mode may be the display mode corresponding to the effect mode at that time, or may be the fourth display mode corresponding to the specific gaming state. However, the same fifth display mode as the special effect symbol TZ4 may be used.

(Display example when shifting to a specific game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a display example in the case of shifting from the jackpot game (low probability non-time saving game state) to the specific game state (probability variation game state) will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), during the final round game (16 rounds) of the jackpot game, the image display device 14 displays the jackpot effect according to the final round, and the right side region of the game area 2A. A strong right-handed image MU that encourages the player to launch a game ball toward the target, a cumulative prize ball number information SK that shows the cumulative value of the number of prize balls that will be paid out to the player during the jackpot game, and a jackpot game. The reduced effect symbol SZ indicating the effect symbol stopped and displayed by the variable effect triggered by the execution is displayed.

Next, when the final round game is completed, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), the image display device executes an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the probabilistic transition image KI indicating the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (effect mode B1) is displayed, and the weak right-handed image MU, which has a lower appeal to the player than the strong right-handed image MU, is displayed. do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting to the probabilistic game state (effect mode B1) (attracting the player's attention). Specifically, a caution image TK for preventing forgetting to take a storage medium (card, coin, etc.) for storing the remaining amount of money put into the game medium lending device attached to the game machine Y is displayed.

Then, when the transition effect is completed, the state shifts to the probabilistic gaming state (effect mode B1), and as shown in FIG. 115 (d), the effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode B1 is set, and the effect symbol TZ1 in the fourth display mode. ~ TZ3, the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode, the background image, the number of consecutive villas image OKG, the strong right-handed image MU, and the remaining number of times image NK (remaining 100 times) are displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol held during the normal gaming state is started, as shown in FIG. 115 (e), the first reserved icon shifts and changes to the changing icon, and the fourth The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode and the special effect symbols TZ4 in the fifth display mode start the variable display to start the variable effect (first variable effect), and the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state is subtracted by 1. Immediately after, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7, the number of the second special figure hold becomes "1" and one second hold icon is displayed.

After that, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 115 (f), the effect symbols "8", "3", and "5" of the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "8", "3", and "5" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect (first variation effect) ends.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 115 (g), the second hold icon shifts and changes to the changing icon, and the effect symbols TZ1 to the fourth display mode are changed. The TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode start the variation display, the variation effect (second variation effect) is executed, and the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state is subtracted by 1.

After that, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 115 (h), the effect symbols "6", "3", and "9" of the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "6", "3", and "9" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect (second variation effect) ends.

In this way, regardless of whether the variable display of the special symbol reserved before the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (effect mode B1) is the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol, When executed after shifting to the probabilistic gaming state (effect mode B1), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the display mode corresponding to the probabilistic game state (effect mode B1) change in the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the symbol. It will be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to separate the display mode of the effect symbol for each game state (effect mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when shifting to the probabilistic gaming state (effect mode B1), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting to the probabilistic game state (effect mode B1) (attracting the attention of the player). Then, since the effect symbols of the display mode corresponding to the probabilistic game state (effect mode B1) are displayed, the player's attention can be attracted to the transition effect, and the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed while the game is in progress. It is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and discomfort of switching.

Although the attention-calling image TK is displayed as the transition effect (predetermined effect), the transition effect may be from the ending effect of the jackpot game to the end of the display of the alert image TK, or the jackpot game. The transition effect may be from the opening effect of the above to the end of the display of the alert image TK.

Further, in the effect mode B1 and the effect mode B2, it does not matter whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Instead, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 having the same display mode (fourth display mode) are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to perform a unified production in one production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect mode B1 and the effect mode B2, it does not matter whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Instead, the special effect symbol TZ4 having the same display mode (fifth display mode) is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to perform a unified production in one production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Display example of variable effect in a specific game state)
Next, a display example of a variable effect in which a specific effect (SP reach effect) is executed in the probabilistic game state (effect mode B1) will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118.

First, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), during the variable display of the second special symbol, the image display device 14 displays the changing icon in the special mode (red) and the fourth display mode. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode are variablely displayed and the variable effect (second variable effect) is executed.

Next, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, the effect symbol "3" in the fourth display mode temporarily stops, respectively, to form a reach state. Normal reach is executed. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 continues the variable display without temporarily stopping.

After that, when developing into a specific effect (SP reach effect), a development effect (predetermined effect) for developing into a specific effect (attracting the attention of the player) is executed. The development effect includes a first development effect and a second development effect. When the jackpot game is not executed, the first development effect is easily executed (execution ratio is high), and the jackpot game is executed. In that case, the second development effect is easy to be executed (execution rate is high). That is, the second development production has a higher expectation of big hit than the first development production.

When the first development effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 116 (c-1), the effect image of the effect mode B1 (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, number of consecutive villas images). The whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 and whitened out so that the visual recognition of OKG, the remaining number of times image NK, etc.) is restricted. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 and the right-handed image MU are displayed on the front side of the whitening effect.

When the second development effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 116 (c-2), the effect image of the effect mode B1 (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, number of consecutive villas images). The darkening effect and the lightning effect are displayed on the display unit 140 so that the visual recognition of OKG, the remaining number of times image NK, etc.) is restricted, and the movable part 17A of the effect device 17 is moved to the position where the lightning effect starts. Move it to make it emit light. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 and the right-handed image MU are displayed on the front side of the whitening effect.

After that, when the development effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the effect image EG and the background image in which the ally character and the enemy character battle each other are displayed, and the SP reach effect (specific effect) is started, and the development effect is started. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the same fourth display mode as before are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen while forming the reach state.

Then, when the result of the variation effect is "loss", as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the image display device 14 displays a character image of "YOU LOSE" notifying that the variation effect is lost. At the same time, the effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" of the fourth display mode, which is a combination of loss, are temporarily stopped.

After that, when the SP reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the image display device 14 has a return effect (predetermined effect) for returning from the SP reach effect (specific effect) (attracting the player's attention). ) Is executed. Specifically, the whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 and whitened out so that the visual recognition of the effect images (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background images, etc.) of the SP reach effect is restricted.

Then, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the effect image of the effect mode B1 such as the effect mode image MD, the background image, the number of consecutive villas image OKG, and the remaining number of times image NK is displayed (visual recognition). (Allowed), the effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the fourth display mode, which are the same as before the return effect, are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the fifth display mode are displayed. The stop display is displayed and the variation effect (second variation effect) ends.

On the other hand, when the result of the variation effect is a "big hit", as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the image display device 14 displays a character image of "YOU WIN" notifying that it is a big hit. At the same time, the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" of the fourth display mode, which is a combination of big hits, are temporarily stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the image display device 14 executes a return effect (predetermined effect) for returning from the SP reach effect (specific effect) (attracting the attention of the player). Specifically, the whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 and whitened out so that the visual recognition of the effect images (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background images, etc.) of the SP reach effect is restricted.
After that, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), the effect image of the effect mode B1 such as the effect mode image MD, the background image, the number of consecutive villas image OKG, and the remaining number of times image NK is displayed (visual recognition). (Allowed), the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fourth display mode, which are the same as before the return effect, are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fifth display mode are displayed. The stop display is displayed, the variation effect (second variation effect) ends, and the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed.

When the re-lottery effect is executed, the same effect as in FIG. 114 (b) is executed between FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b).

In this way, when a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is started in the variable effect during the specific game state, the image display device 14 develops the specific effect (attracts the player's attention). Although the development effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the display mode of the effect symbol is not switched unlike the normal game state, so that the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the variable effect to reduce the unnaturalness and discomfort. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the specific effect (re-lottery effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) ends in the variable effect during the specific game state, the image display device 14 returns from the specific effect (attracts the player's attention). However, unlike the normal game state and the inside, the display mode of the effect symbol is not switched, so that the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the variable effect. It is possible to reduce it.

Furthermore, since there are multiple types of development effects for shifting to a specific effect, and the expectation of each jackpot is set to be different, the player's expectation of which development effect will be executed is improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since one of the development effects for shifting to the specific effect and the return effect for returning from the specific effect have the same effect mode, it is possible to clearly grasp the start and end of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are not displayed on the display unit 140 during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, they may be displayed on the display unit 140. In that case, it is advisable to reduce the display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 toward the edge of the screen (for example, upper left or upper right) in a state of superimposing the whitening effect or the blackening effect.

Further, when a sub image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 14, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the sub image display device during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, and the development effect and the development effect are performed. After the return effect is completed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed on the image display device 14.

Further, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, the display mode may be the display mode corresponding to the effect mode at that time, or may be the fourth display mode corresponding to the specific gaming state. However, the same fifth display mode as the special effect symbol TZ4 may be used.

Further, although the right-handed image MU is displayed during the period from the start of the development effect to the end of the return effect, the right-handed image MU may not be displayed, and the right side is displayed during the development effect and the return effect. Although the hit image MU is not displayed, the right-handed image MU may be displayed during the execution of the specific effect.

(Display example when the production mode changes during a specific game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, a display example when the effect mode changes during the specific gaming state will be described.

First, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the effect symbols "5", "2", and "3" of the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the fifth display mode is displayed. The special effect symbols "5", "2", and "3" are stopped and displayed, the changing icon is erased, and the variation effect (second variation effect) ends. At this time, it is assumed that the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state is 5 times and the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the second hold icon shifts and changes to the changing icon, and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode is started. Starts the variable display and the variable effect (second variable effect) is started.

Immediately after that, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) and 119 (d), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the attention of the player). .. Specifically, the display unit 140 is such that the visual recognition of the effect image of the effect mode B1 (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, consecutive villa count image OKG, remaining count image NK, background image, etc.) is restricted. Display the darkening effect on the screen and make it darken (blackout). Then, after displaying the closing of the sliding door image behind the special effect symbol TZ4 and the right-handed image MU, the display of opening the sliding door image is performed. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

Then, when the fusuma image is completely opened and the transition effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 119 (e) and 119 (f), the effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode B2 is set, the consecutive villa number image OKG, The production image of the production mode B2 such as the remaining number of times image NK and the background image is displayed (visualization is permitted), and the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the same fourth display mode as before the transition production start variable display, and the specific game state is changed. A countdown image CD indicating that the number of remaining times until the end is 4 is displayed.

After that, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 119 (g), the effect symbols "4", "7", and "9" of the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "4", "7", and "9" are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect (second variation effect) ends. The countdown image is displayed for each variable effect until the remaining number of times until the end of the specific game state becomes 0.

In this way, when the effect mode shifts, the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the player's attention), but unlike the normal gaming state. Since the display mode of the effect symbol is not switched, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and discomfort that the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the progress of the game.

Further, since the transition effect executed when the effect mode shifts in the specific game state is the same as the transition effect executed when the effect mode shifts in the normal game state, the effect mode shifts. It becomes easier for the player to detect what to do, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a transition effect (predetermined effect), the display unit 140 is blacked out to close and open the fusuma image, but only the display unit 140 is darkened without closing and opening the fusuma image. It may be done, or only the sliding door image may be closed and opened without darkening the display unit 140. Further, instead of darkening the display unit 140, a whitening effect may be displayed on the display unit 140 to cause whitening (whiteout).

Further, while the transition effect is being executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the display unit 140, but may not be displayed on the display unit 140.

When a sub image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 14, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the sub image display device during the execution of the transition effect, and the image is displayed after the transition effect is completed. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed on the display device 14.

Further, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed during the execution of the transition effect may be a display mode corresponding to the effect mode before the transition, or may be a display mode corresponding to the effect mode after the transition, or may be specified. It may be the 4th display mode corresponding to the gaming state, or it may be the same 5th display mode as the special effect symbol TZ4.

In addition, since the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied at the end of the variable effect, the transition effect is executed at the start of the first variable effect after the transition condition is satisfied, but the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied. The transition effect may be executed at the end of the variable effect.

Further, in the specific gaming state, the production mode does not shift when shifting from the probabilistic gaming state to the low probability time-shortening gaming state, but the production mode may be shifted, and even in that case, the production mode may be changed. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be left in the fourth display mode.

(Display example of the last fluctuation effect in a specific game state)
Next, a display example of the final variable effect in the specific gaming state (effect mode B2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122.

First, with reference to FIG. 120, a display example will be described in which the final variable effect in the specific game state (effect mode B2) becomes a loss and the mode shifts to the normal game state (effect mode A0).

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), during the variable display of the second special symbol, the image display device 14 variablely displays the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the fourth display mode and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode. The variable effect (second variable effect) is executed, and a countdown image CD indicating that the number of remaining times until the end of the specific gaming state is 0 (last) is displayed.

After that, when the last chance effect (suggestion effect) that expects the execution of the jackpot game (whether or not to shift to the normal game state) is not executed, the fourth display is as shown in FIG. 120 (b-1). The variable display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the embodiment continues.

On the other hand, when the last chance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-2), the image display device 14 prompts the operation of the character image indicating the last chance and the effect button 18A. The promotion image (button image BG) for the purpose is displayed, the valid period occurs, and the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 swings in the vertical direction. At this time, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the glass door Y2 have a light emission mode (all LEDs or some LEDs) having a lower effect (appeal power) than the normal light emission mode. Brightness decreases, all LEDs or some LEDs are turned off, etc.).

Then, when the last chance effect is not executed, the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, and the effect button 18A is not operated during the valid period, as shown in FIG. 120 (c). In the image display device 14, the effect mode is changed, and the result showing the result of the game in the advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (first hit) generated in the normal game state. The notification effect (predetermined effect) is executed, and the operation of the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is stopped.

Specifically, the display unit 140 is such that the visual recognition of the effect image of the effect mode B1 (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, consecutive villa count image OKG, remaining count image NK, background image, etc.) is restricted. A darkening effect with poor color (hue, tint, color) is displayed and darkened (blacked out). Then, a result notification image (end image, number of consecutive villas image OKG,) showing the result of the game in the advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (first hit) generated in the normal game state. Cumulative prize ball number information SK, background image, etc.) is displayed. In the result notification image, a background image whose color is lower than that of the normal background image is displayed. However, in order to reduce the color of the result notification image, the background image is added to or replaced with the background image. It may be possible to display a dark color effect or the like.

Further, the effect images TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the glass door Y2 have a more effect effect than the normal light emitting mode. (Appeal power) is a low loss light emission mode (decreased brightness of all LEDs or some LEDs, extinguishing of all LEDs or some LEDs, etc.).

Then, when the result notification effect is completed and the effect mode transition condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode A0 is set, the effect mode A0 such as the background image, and the like are produced. The image is displayed (visualization is permissible), and the effect symbols "5", "3", and "4" of the first display mode switched from the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "5", "3", and "4" are displayed. 4 ”is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect (second variation effect) ends. Further, a left-handed image HU urging the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 2A is displayed in the upper left of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a display example in which the final variable effect in the specific gaming state (effect mode B2) becomes a big hit will be described. Here, the explanation will be given from the scene where the last chance production is executed.

As shown in FIG. 121 (a), the image display device 14 displays a character image indicating that it is the last chance and a promotion image (button image BG) for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, and has a valid period. Is generated, and the movable portion 17A of the effecting accessory device 17 swings in the vertical direction. At this time, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device provided on the glass door Y2 have a light emission mode (all LEDs or some LEDs) having a lower effect effect (appeal power) than the normal light emission mode. Brightness is reduced, all LEDs or some LEDs are turned off, etc.).

Then, when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period and when the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the image display device 14 displays the effect image (effect) of the effect mode B2. The display unit 140 displays the darkening effect and the lightning effect so that the visual recognition of the mode image, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the background image, etc.) is restricted, and the movable part 17A of the effect device 17 is used as the lightning effect. Move it to the starting point and make it emit light.

At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the special effect symbols TZ4, and the right-handed image MU are displayed on the front side of the blackout effect. Further, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device provided on the glass door Y2 have a higher effect (appeal power) than the normal light emission mode (improvement of brightness of all LEDs, all). LED lighting, LED iridescent emission, etc.).

After that, when the last chance effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 121 (c), the effect image of the effect mode B2 such as the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the background image is displayed (visual recognition is allowed), and the jackpot is hit. The combination of the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fourth display mode is stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed. (The first variable effect) is completed, and the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a display example in which the final variable effect in the specific gaming state (effect mode B2) becomes a big hit in the revival pattern will be described. Here, the explanation will be given from the scene where the last chance production is executed.

As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the image display device 14 displays a character image indicating that it is the last chance and a promotion image (button image BG) for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, and has a valid period. Is generated, and the movable portion 17A of the effecting accessory device 17 swings in the vertical direction. At this time, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device provided on the glass door Y2 have a light emission mode (all LEDs or some LEDs) having a lower effect effect (appeal power) than the normal light emission mode. Brightness is reduced, all LEDs or some LEDs are turned off, etc.).

When the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period and the effect button 18A is not operated during the valid period, the image display device 14 sets the effect mode as shown in FIG. 122 (b). Along with the transition, a result notification effect (predetermined effect) showing the result of the game during the advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (first hit) generated in the normal game state is executed. The operation of the movable portion 17A of the effecting accessory device 17 is stopped.

Specifically, the display unit 140 is such that the visual recognition of the effect image of the effect mode B1 (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, consecutive villa count image OKG, remaining count image NK, background image, etc.) is restricted. Display the darkening effect on the screen and make it darken (blackout). Then, a result notification image (end image, number of consecutive villas image OKG,) showing the result of the game in the advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (first hit) generated in the normal game state. Cumulative prize ball number information SK) is displayed.

Further, the effect images TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the glass door Y2 have a more effect effect than the normal light emitting mode. (Appeal power) is a low loss light emission mode (decreased brightness of all LEDs or some LEDs, extinguishing of all LEDs or some LEDs, etc.).

Then, when the result notification effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 122 (c), the effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode A0 is set even though the transition condition to the effect mode A0 is not satisfied, the background. The effect image of the effect mode A0 such as an image is displayed, and the effect symbols "5", "3", and "4" of the first display mode switched from the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed, but the special effect symbol TZ4 is variablely displayed. Continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), in the image display device 14, the display unit is restricted from visually recognizing the effect image (effect mode image, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, etc.) in the effect mode A0. The darkening effect and the lightning effect are displayed on the 140, and the movable portion 17A of the effect device 17 is moved to the position where the lightning effect starts to emit light.

At this time, the effect images TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the special effect symbols TZ4, and the right-handed image MU are displayed in front of the darkening effect. Become. Further, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device provided on the glass door Y2 have a higher effect (appeal power) than the normal light emission mode (improvement of brightness of all LEDs, all). LED lighting, LED iridescent emission, etc.).

After that, when the last chance effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 122 (e), the effect image of the effect mode B2 such as the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the background image is displayed, and the fourth is a big hit combination. The effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (first variable effect) is displayed. ) Ends.

Then, when the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 122 (f), a right-handed image MU for opening is displayed on the upper right of the display unit 140, and the jackpot game is displayed on the remaining portion of the display unit 140. The opening image OPG indicating that it is the opening of is displayed.

After that, when the first round game is started, the round effect is executed as shown in FIG. 122 (g). Specifically, the round information indicating that it is the first round game, the right-handed image MU, the cumulative prize ball number information SK that inherits the cumulative value of the prize balls displayed during the result notification production, and the jackpot game. The effect symbol TZ that triggered the execution is displayed.

In this way, when shifting to the normal game state (effect mode A0), the image display device 14 shifts to the normal game state (effect mode A0), and at the same time, the jackpot game (first hit) generated in the normal game state is specified. A result notification effect (predetermined effect) indicating the result of the game during the advantageous period in which the game state is continuously (continuously) is executed, and a display mode corresponding to the normal game state (effect mode A0) is displayed. Since the display is performed, the player's attention can be attracted to the transition effect, and it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and discomfort that the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are switched during the progress of the game.

Further, in the case of shifting to the normal game state (effect mode A0), after operating the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17, the effect symbol of the display mode corresponding to the normal game state (effect mode A0) is displayed. Therefore, the player's attention can be attracted to the movement of the movable portion 17A, and it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and discomfort that the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are switched during the progress of the game.

Further, when the final variable effect in the specific game state (effect mode B2) becomes a big hit in the revival pattern, after displaying the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode corresponding to the effect mode A0, the effect device for the effect. Since the movable portion 17A of the 17 is operated to display the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode corresponding to the specific gaming state (effect mode B2), the player's attention can be attracted to the operation of the movable portion 17A. It is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and discomfort that the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are switched during the execution of the variable effect.

Although the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display unit 140 during the execution of the result notification effect, they may not be displayed.

In the present embodiment, in the effect mode A0, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the first display mode as in the effect mode A1, but the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same manner as in the effect mode B2. May be displayed in the fourth display mode. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play after the end of the specific gaming state, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine Y.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the normal gaming state, the character image CYG of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 does not execute the action effect when stopped, but the effect is temporarily stopped. Occasionally, the character image CYG of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be executed when the action effect is stopped, or when the variation of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is started, the character images CYG of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are predetermined. The action effect may be executed at the start of performing the action. In that case, the effect mode of the start action effect and the stop action effect may be the same or different.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the transition effect for shifting the effect mode, the fusuma image displayed on the image display device 14 has the same display mode regardless of the case, but the fusuma image is used. When executing the advance notice effect that is expected to execute the jackpot game, the display mode of the fusuma image may be a special display mode different from the normal display mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific game state (effect mode B2) is changed to the normal game state (effect mode A0), the result notification effect is always executed, but the result notification effect is executed. Instead, the transition effect of displaying the whitening effect on the display unit 140 and causing it to turn white (white out) may be executed, or the transition effect of displaying the blackout effect on the display unit 140 and causing it to turn black out (blackout) may be executed. You may try to perform the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sizes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are not changed between the probabilistic game state (effect mode B1) and the low probability time-shortening game state (effect mode B2), but the probabilistic game state (effect). The sizes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be different between the mode B1) and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state (effect mode B2). For example, it is preferable that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed larger in the low probability short game state (effect mode B2) than in the probability change game state (effect mode B1).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state or the specific game state, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are the first. Although it was designed to be displayed in four display modes, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in one of the normal game state and the specific game state, but the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the other of the normal game state and the specific game state. It may not be displayed.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, when a variation display of a symbol executed based on the establishment of a starting condition becomes a predetermined special result, it is generally possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In such a gaming machine, there is a game machine in which an effect symbol is displayed on a display means, and a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol is executed during the variation display of the symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-03377). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the display content of the display means, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is low.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, a symbol executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening) ( When the variable display of the special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the player is more advantageous to the normal game state and the normal game state than the normal game state in the game machine capable of performing the special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player. The effect symbol is displayed on the game state control means (main control board 101) and the display means (image display device 14) that can be controlled to a specific game state, and the effect symbol is displayed during the variable display of the symbol. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display is provided, and the variable effect executing means has a specific effect (SP reach) during the variable effect. The effect (SPSP reach effect) can be executed, the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the normal gaming state, and the effect symbol is displayed in the predetermined display mode in the specific game state. When displaying in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) with a lower decorativeness than the display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) and shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, When a predetermined effect (result notification effect) is executed by the display means to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode, and the specific effect is executed during the variable effect in the normal gaming state. , The effect symbol is switched from a predetermined display mode to a specific display mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the player rather than the normal gaming state. The effect symbol is displayed on the game state control means (main control board 101) and the display means (image display device 14) that can be controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the effect is displayed during the variable display of the symbol. The variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the symbol is provided, and the variation effect execution means is specified during the variation effect (the effect control board 102, the image control board 105). The SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect) can be executed, the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the normal gaming state, and the effect symbol is displayed in the specific game state. When displaying in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) with a lower decorativeness than a predetermined display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) and shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. Performs a predetermined effect (result notification effect) on the display means to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode, and executes the specific effect during the variable effect in the normal gaming state. In the case, the effect symbol is switched from a predetermined display mode to a specific display mode, but when the specific effect is executed during the variable effect in the specific gaming state, the effect symbol remains in the specific display mode. It is designed to be maintained. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the player rather than the normal gaming state. The effect symbol is displayed on the game state control means (main control board 101) and the display means (image display device 14) that can be controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the effect is displayed during the variable display of the symbol. A variation effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol, and an effect mode control means (effect control) for changing the effect mode for executing the variation effect. The board 102 and the image control board 105) are provided, and the variable effect executing means displays the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the normal game state, and the specific game state. In, the effect symbol is displayed in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) having a lower decorativeness (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) than the predetermined display mode, and the normal game state is changed to the normal display mode. When shifting to the gaming state, the display means executes a predetermined effect (result notification effect) to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode, and the effect mode changes during the specific game state. When this is done, the effect symbol is maintained in a specific display mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the player rather than the normal gaming state. The effect symbol is displayed on the game state control means (main control board 101) and the display means (image display device 14) that can be controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the effect is displayed during the variable display of the symbol. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a symbol, and a special symbol (special effect symbol) corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the symbol. A special variation display means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation display of the above is provided, and the variation effect execution means displays the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode in the normal gaming state. (1st to 3rd display modes), and in the specific gaming state, the effect symbol is less decorative than the predetermined display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) in a specific display mode. When displaying in (fourth display mode) and shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, a predetermined effect (result notification effect) is executed by the display means to determine the effect symbol from the specific display mode. The special variation display means displays the special symbol in a common display mode (fifth display mode) regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state. ing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the player rather than the normal gaming state. The effect symbol is displayed on the game state control means (main control board 101) and the display means (image display device 14) that can be controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the effect is displayed during the variable display of the symbol. The variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the symbol is provided, and the variation effect executing means is the effect symbol in the normal gaming state. Is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes), and the effect symbol is less decorative than the predetermined display mode in the specific gaming state (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.). ) When displaying in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) and shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display means starts from the jackpot game (first hit) generated in the normal gaming state. The notification effect (result notification effect) for notifying the result of the game in the advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) is executed to switch the effect symbol from the specific display mode to the predetermined display mode. It has become like. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the player rather than the normal gaming state. The effect symbol is displayed on the game state control means (main control board 101) and the display means (image display device 14) that can be controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the effect is displayed during the variable display of the symbol. The variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the symbol is provided, and the variation effect executing means is the effect symbol in the normal gaming state. Is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes), and the effect symbol is less decorative than the predetermined display mode in the specific gaming state (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.). ) When displaying in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) and shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display means has a specific effect in which the background color is lower than that of the normal effect display. The display (result notification effect, transition effect) is executed to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the operating means (directing) that the player can operate in the gaming machine that can execute the special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. Button), a game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a display means (image display device 14). ), And the variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of displaying the effect symbol and executing the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol. The variable effect executing means displays the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the normal gaming state, and displays the effect symbol in the specific game state from the predetermined display mode. It is displayed in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) with low decorativeness (simple design, few colors, dark colors, etc.), and is based on the operation of the operating means in the variable effect in the specific gaming state. When the suggestion effect (last chance effect) of whether or not to shift to the normal game state is executed and the state shifts to the normal game state, the display means is used for a predetermined period (occurs in the normal game state) after the suggestion effect. A notification effect (result notification effect) for notifying the result of the game in the advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (first hit) is executed, and the effect symbol is displayed in a specific display mode. Is designed to switch to a predetermined display mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the player rather than the normal gaming state. The effect symbol is displayed on the game state control means (main control board 101) and the display means (image display device 14) that can be controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the effect is displayed during the variable display of the symbol. The variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the symbol is provided, and the variation effect executing means is the effect symbol in the normal gaming state. Is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes), and the effect symbol is less decorative than the predetermined display mode in the specific gaming state (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.). ) When displaying in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) and shifting to the specific gaming state, a predetermined effect (transition effect) is executed by the display means to display the effect symbol in the specific display mode. It has become like. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol during the variation display of the symbol, and the effect of executing the variation effect. It is possible to control the mode to a predetermined effect mode (one of the effect modes A0 to A3 and the effect modes B1 to B2) and a specific effect mode (the other of the effect modes A0 to A3 and the effect modes B1 to B2). The effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) is provided, and the variable effect execution means displays the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the predetermined effect mode. And one of the fourth display modes), and in the specific effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a specific display mode different from the predetermined display mode (the other of the first to third display modes and the fourth display mode). When the display means shifts from the predetermined effect mode to the specific effect mode, the display means executes a predetermined effect (transition effect, result notification effect) to display the effect symbol from a predetermined display mode. It is designed to switch to the display mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol is provided, and the variable effect executing means is provided. , The specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) can be executed during the variable effect, and the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display) before the specific effect is executed in the variable effect. A specific display mode in which the effect symbol is less decorative than the predetermined display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) while the specific effect is being executed in the variable effect. When displaying in (fourth display mode) and executing the specific effect during the variable effect, the display means executes a predetermined effect (development effect) to display the effect symbol from the predetermined display mode. It is designed to switch to the mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol is provided, and the variable effect executing means is provided. , The specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) can be executed during the variable effect, and the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third) while the specific effect is not executed in the variable effect. Display mode), and during the execution of the specific effect in the variable effect, the effect symbol is displayed in a specific display having a lower decorativeness (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) than the predetermined display mode. When displaying in the aspect (fourth display aspect) and ending the specific effect during the variation effect, the display means executes a predetermined effect (return effect) to display the effect symbol from the specific display mode. It is designed to switch to the display mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol is provided, and the variable effect executing means is provided. , The specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) can be executed during the variable effect, and the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display) before the specific effect is executed in the variable effect. A specific display mode in which the effect symbol is less decorative than the predetermined display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) while the specific effect is being executed in the variable effect. When displaying in (fourth display mode) and starting the specific effect during the variable effect, the display means executes a predetermined effect (development effect) to specify the effect symbol from the predetermined display mode. When switching to the display mode of the above and ending the specific effect during the variable effect, the display means executes a predetermined effect (return effect) to switch the effect symbol from the specific display mode to the predetermined display mode. It has become. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, a movable member (directing role) that can operate in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. It is possible to display the effect symbol on the moving part of the object device) and the display means (image display device 14), and execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol during the variation display of the symbol. A means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) is provided, and the variable effect executing means can execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) during the variable effect, and in the variable effect, the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) can be executed. Before the execution of the specific effect, the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes), and during the execution of the specific effect in the variable effect, the effect symbol is displayed in the predetermined display mode. When displaying in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) having a lower decorativeness (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) and starting the specific effect during the variable effect, the movable member Is operated to switch the effect symbol from a predetermined display mode to a specific display mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol during the variation display of the symbol, and the effect of executing the variation effect. The effect mode control means (effect control board 102) capable of controlling the mode to the first effect mode (effect mode A1), the second effect mode (effect mode A2), and the third effect mode (effect mode A3). , Image control board 105), and the variable effect executing means displays the effect symbol in the first display mode in the first effect mode, and displays the effect symbol in the second display mode in the second effect mode. In the third effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in the third display mode, and when the effect mode shifts, a predetermined effect (transition effect) is executed by the display means to display the effect symbol. The mode is switched, and the predetermined effect when shifting from the first effect mode to the second effect mode and the predetermined effect when shifting from the second effect mode to the third effect mode are the same or similar. It is feasible in the production mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, a movable member (directing role) that can operate in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to display the effect symbol on the moving part of the object device) and the display means (image display device 14), and execute the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol during the variation display of the symbol. The means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) and the effect mode for executing the variable effect are the first effect mode (one of the effect modes A0 to A3 and the effect modes B1 to B2) and the second effect. The effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of controlling the mode (the other of the effect modes A0 to A3 and the effect modes B1 to B2) is provided, and the variable effect execution means is provided. In the first effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode, and in the second effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. When shifting from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, the movable member is operated to switch the effect symbol from the first display mode to the second display mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and the first gaming state (normal gaming state) are performed in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A gaming state control means (main control board 101) that can be controlled to a second gaming state (probability variable gaming state, low probability time-shortening gaming state) having a different degree of advantage to the player from the first gaming state, and a display means. Variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board) capable of displaying an effect symbol on (image display device 14) and executing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol during the variation display of the symbol. 105), and the variable effect executing means displays the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the first game state, and the predetermined display mode in the second game state. When displaying in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) different from the display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) and shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the above A type of the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed during the variation effect in the first gaming state by executing a predetermined effect (transition effect) by the display means to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode. The number (12 types) and the number of types (9 types) of the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed during the variation effect in the second gaming state are different. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◇ Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of performing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol during the variation display of the symbol, and the effect of executing the variation effect. The mode is provided with an effect mode control means capable of controlling the first effect mode (any of the effect modes A0 to A3) and the second effect mode (the rest of the effect modes A0 to A3). , The variation effect is the first variation effect executed during the variation display of the symbol based on the establishment of the first start condition (the entry of the game ball into the first start port), and the second start condition. There is a second variation effect executed during the variation display of the symbol based on the establishment (entry of the game ball into the second start port), and the variation effect execution means is the effect in the first effect mode. The symbol is displayed in the first display mode (any of the first to third display modes), and in the second effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a second display mode (second display mode) different from the first display mode. When displaying in (remaining of the first to third display modes) and shifting from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, the display means executes a predetermined effect (transition effect) to display the effect symbol. The first display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode, and in the first effect mode, the first display mode is used regardless of whether the first variation effect or the second variation effect is used. The variable effect is executed using the effect symbol of. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player has not been executed even though the start condition is satisfied. The effect symbols are displayed on the hold storage means (main control board 101) capable of holding the variation display of the symbols up to a predetermined number and the display means (image display device 14), and the effect is displayed during the variation display of the symbols. The first effect mode (effect mode) is a variation effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol, and an effect mode for executing the variation effect. (A0 to A3) and a second effect mode (remaining of the effect modes A0 to A3) are provided with effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) that can be controlled. The variable effect executing means displays the effect symbol in the first display mode (any of the first to third display modes) in the first effect mode, and the effect symbol in the second effect mode. Is displayed in a second display mode (remaining of the first to third display modes) different from the first display mode, and when shifting from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, the display is described. Even if the effect symbol is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode by executing a predetermined effect (transition effect) by means, and the variable display of the symbol is held during the first effect mode. When executed during the second effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode in the variation effect executed during the variation display of the symbol. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol during the variation display of the symbol, and the effect of executing the variation effect. The effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board) capable of controlling the mode to the first effect mode (effect mode A0 to A3) and the second effect mode (effect mode B1 to B2). 105), and the variable effect executing means displays the effect symbol in the first display mode (first to third display modes) in the first effect mode, and in the second effect mode. The effect pattern is displayed in a second display mode (fourth display mode) different from the first display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.), and the first effect mode is selected from the second effect mode. In the case of shifting to the effect mode of, when a predetermined effect (transition effect) is executed by the display means, the effect symbol is switched from the second display mode to the first display mode, and the power of the gaming machine is restored. When controlled to the first effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode, while when controlled to the second effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode. The identification information of the effect symbol is set to be common identification information (“1”, “3”, “5”). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the execution is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and the first gaming state (normal gaming state) are performed in the gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A game state control means that can be controlled to a second game state (probability variation game state, low probability time-shortening game state) that is more advantageous to the player than one game state, and an effect design on the display means (image display device 14). Is provided, and the variation effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol during the variation display of the symbol is provided. The effect executing means displays the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the first game state, and decorates the effect symbol in the second game state more than the predetermined display mode. When displaying in a specific display mode (remaining of the fourth display mode) with low characteristics (simple design, few colors, dark colors, etc.) and shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the above A predetermined effect (transition effect) is executed by the display means to switch the effect symbol from the predetermined display mode to a specific display mode, and the type of the predetermined display mode is more than the type of the specific display mode (1 type). (3 types) are more common. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine Y of the present embodiment is to be shifted to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the jackpot games, but the first big winning opening or the first big winning opening opened in a specific round game of the jackpot game or When the game ball passes through a specific area provided inside the second big winning opening, it may be a game machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, if the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state after the end of all jackpot games and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the normal game state is normally executed. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

If the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and if the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, the next time after the end of the jackpot game. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the first special symbol has priority. It may be executed.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine such as the gaming machine Y, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jiyan ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

Y game machine 6 1st start port 6a 1st start port detection sensor 7 2nd start port 7a 2nd start port detection sensor 8 Grand prize opening 10 Winning gate 14 Image display device 15 Audio output device 16 Directional lighting device 70 2nd Starting port control device 80 Grand prize opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b main ROM
101c main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b sub ROM
102c sub RAM
140 Display unit 141 1st hold icon display area 142 Changing icon display area 143 2nd hold icon display area

Claims (1)

When the variable display of the symbol executed based on the establishment of the starting condition becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player.
A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and
A variable effect executing means capable of displaying a plurality of effect symbols on a display means and executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the plurality of effect symbols during the variable display of the symbol.
The effect mode control means capable of controlling the effect mode for executing the variable effect to any one of a plurality of effect modes is provided.
The variable effect executing means is
In the first effect mode controlled during the normal gaming state, the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in the first display mode.
In the second effect mode controlled during the specific gaming state, the plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode.
When the power of the gaming machine is restored, the combination of the numerical information included in the plurality of effect symbols is common to any of the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the plurality of them. The numerical information included in the production design of is displayed as different numerical information,
The production design is
The total number of types that can be derived during the variation display displayed in the second display mode is smaller than the total number of types that can be derived during the variation display displayed in the first display mode.
When performing a specific reach effect in the variable effect in the first effect mode,
The effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode before the specific reach effect, and the effect symbol is displayed in a display mode having a lower decorativeness than the first display mode during the specific reach effect. The effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode after the end of the specific reach effect.
When performing a specific reach effect in the variable effect in the second effect mode,
The effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode before the specific reach effect, the effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode during the specific reach effect, and the effect is displayed after the specific reach effect. A gaming machine characterized in that a symbol is displayed in the second display mode.

Images